Home

High End DL2 Digital Light Manual

1. ace Media Folder Name Content Description 1 HES Core Media Files Premier High End Systems video loop collection 2 HES Digital Aerials 1 aoe still images and animations designed specifically for aerial 3 HES_ Oils Digitally simulated psychedelic oil projection loops 4 HES Atmospheric Video loops of natural settings clouds water fire 5 On The Wall Studios Digital video loops promotional 6 Sean Bridwell Digital video loops promotional 7 A Luna Blue Digital video loops promotional 8 Feedback Video Digital video loops promotional 9 HES_ Textures Video loop textures 10 HES Foliage Collection of abstract and realistic foliage and floral video loops 11 HES Religious Religious themed video loops 12 HES Gothic Set of themed video loops 13 HES Digital Aerials 2 Digital still images and animations designed specifically for aerial effects 14 HES Theme Stills Nature stills foliage and flowers 15 Apollo Glass 1 Digital Gobo Patterns promotional 16 Artbeats Digital video loops promotional 17 DHA TopMac Digital patterns promotional 18 Beacon DigiGobos Digital video loops promotional 19 Amorphous Digi gobos Digital animations promotional 20 InLight Digital video loops promotional 21 HES Lithopatterns 1 High End Systems Lithopattern images 22 HES Lithopatterns 2 More images from High End Systems Lithopattern library 23 HES Logos High End
2. 135 Installing the CMA scssesissesessesesaeuna nena nena nth a nhan nua nan nan 135 Upgrading CMA Software to a Newer Version ssesss mm 136 AUTO DISCOVERY aria reete ete gas e UR tues QN ER EORR I CIO E AXE euler RRR REIR QUE 136 Fixt re EdentiflCatiOn 3 5 eee tr tete tereti center a eat e data e ren tiki pev eta qd ra 136 The Management Client Window seeeeseeseeeeen nennen nana nnn nnn 136 Viewing Server Identification Information cssssssses me 137 Client Window Content Organization sssssssssssese mmn 138 Preloaded Stock Content 1 cene di eee e n rmn a adai iiid 138 Custom User Conte tusiiatacolia eoe delatae isis eub btoiaa cadence tadarelaniaine ais 138 Media Files cuan A sere ARRA Pe TRIS OA 138 3D Object Files vss ai der eet Ms Ae tecum Nea aA te OA rostros coy 139 Viewing Server Configuration Data sssssssssssssssss ee memes emen 139 Viewing Content iih erre A er VEU ii anata Pr YR T Cea 139 Viewing Folders derer eere pe dne Maud teme eet Qe dco Pei dx FERMER ne dua 140 VIEWING FIlES iii AA EYE ERRAT CE Exe Une A vai e e EE TY E YES 140 Managing User Content oocccnonocnonncannncnnnncnnnncnnnnnrannnennnnrnnnnrnnnnrannnrnnnnrnnannnns 141 Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders s usse 141 Assigning DMX Values to User Content sssss
3. esses nnn nnn 177 This table describes the Standard Dual and Single Protocol for DL 2 fixtures Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table eene 229 This table lists the MSpeed motor movement times and their corresponding DMX controller values Appendix C Custom User Content There are several considerations to keep in mind when creating custom content to control with the DL 2 graphics engine software Creating Video Media Files cccccccccccucueuceeeeeeeeeceueueueueueueuaueuueueueeeeeeeeeeuenens 231 Creating 3 D Objects 0mmcccnconocanacacacacacananananannnnncanananannnanananananancncnrarararananas 231 Managing Custom Content ccoconnnnnononononananananacananananancncararararanananananananancanas 232 Appendix D DL 2 Specifications Fixture mechanical electrical optical and component cpecifications are listed Mechanical M 233 Electrical Specifications oomoonccnonncnnnncannncnnnncnnnncnnnncnncnnrnnnrnncnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnanenos 234 Projector Specifications ommocnnnnnononanannnannnncncncanananananancncncncararararanananananannns 234 Camera Module Specification eeeeseeeeseeseseese nennen nennen nnns 234 Environmental Specifications eeseseeseseeie sees seen ne nennt nane nnns 234 Cable and Connector Specifications cooomonocnonncnnnncnnnannnnncnnracanrncnnrncnnrncnnnas 235 Vide Connectors EE 235 Periphera
4. Location LED State Problem Description l LD1 Steady Orange No S3 iris sensor open Fixture Red Green or OFF Yes Link communication error Head Slow Flashing Green No Running system code normal operation Card LD2 Fast Flashing Green Maybe Running boot code expecting or updating firmware Red Green or OFF Yes No firmware or power LD1 Flashing Green No Normal operation Flashing Red Maybe Updating firmware Base Off Maybe No DMX send or received Housing LD2 Green No Receiving DMX Card Red Maybe Transmitting DMX LD3 Steady Orange No Normal Operation Red Green or OFF Yes Link Communication error General Troubleshooting Suggestions The following table shows general troubleshooting suggestions Problem Won t power on Check the fuse page 162 Verify fixture is plugged in to an appropriately rated power source power ratings are shown on page 234 Check power cord wiring page page 234 Solution During certain movements the fixture motion slows missteps or loses position f you have loosened or tightened anything in the pan and tilt assemblies the stepper motors may be out of alignment Recalibrate pan and tilt motors by selecting Calibrate Motors button in the Test Home menu screen Powers on but no image page 129 Is the mechanical iris closed If so check the setting for the Dimmer parameter see Dimmer on page 127 Did you recently change i
5. Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls 49 transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Moa3 sets overall color range 208 DL 2 User Manual Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling 49 scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 63 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 64 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Effect Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation 66 110 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 0 Mode 1 Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation 67 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation 68 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation 69
6. DL 2 User Manual 7 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Mounting the Fixture You can mount DL 2 fixtures suspended from a support system such as a truss or freestanding on its base CAUTION WARNING Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture N Always use a secondary safety cable when mounting this fixture Maintain a minimum focus distance of 1 4 meters from a 14m combustible object C Do not mount on a flammable surface Note Due to the wide variety of possible lighting designs High End Systems cannot make specific mounting recommendations Consider the following procedure as a suggested guideline only Fog Machine Warning Like all high quality video projection units the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke DL 2 incorporates a two stage air filtering system with additional washable prefilters in the head and base housing to reduce these risks to a minimum However you must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check Do not situate DL 2 in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer Minimize the exposure of DL 2 to both glycol fo
7. Modifier 1 Selects from color schemes along a range of values from O 255 Modifier 2 Sets the zero point of the color intensity level from 0 no intensity to 255 100 maximum intensity Modifier 3 Fades from original color scheme to new color scheme using selected intensity Color to Alpha Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 49 This parameter varies the transparency level of an image s component color values 102 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 1 Increases the red component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 full red opacity intensity Modifier 2 Increases the green component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 full green opacity intensity Modifier 3 Increases the blue component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 full blue opacity intensity Color to Alpha Inverted Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 50 This parameter varies the transparency level of the inverse of an image s component color values Modifier 1 Increases the inverse red component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full green and blue opacity intensity Modifier 2 Increases the green component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 full red and blue opacity intensity Modifier 3 Increases the
8. Note When installing the CMA on a laptop disable the wireless adapter to prevent IP address conflicts that can keep the CMA from recognizing DL 2 fixtures DL 2 User Manual 135 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Insert the CD that shipped with your fixture to automatically install the CMA on your harddrive NOTE If you are running Windows OS and the CMA doesn t automatically install navigate to the dl2client msi file in your windows browser and double click to install the CMA Upgrading CMA Software to a Newer Version The latest fixture and CMA client software is always available at the High End Systems website www highend com support Check the fixture s currently installed software version under the Info tab of the fixture s menu system see Info Version Screen on page 32 or through the CMA s All Servers view see Viewing Server Identification Information on page 137 To upgrade the fixture or CMA client software first download the file from the website to your computer Then use the CMA to upload it to your DL 2 fixtures Auto Discovery When a DL 2 fixture is connected to a network it sends out Discovery messages These messages are received by other DL 2 fixtures as well as the CMA software The messages contain information that allows the DL 2 fixtures to communicate with each other and the CMA to communicate with all the DL 2 fixtures on the network This information includes the IP Address
9. Remember The Dimmer Opacity and Global Intensity Parameters all have to be greater than zero before the image you create becomes visible DL 2 User Manual 43 CHAPTER 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content Content Selection Parameters The following sections outline parameters you will use to create an image from content and define it s playback You will set the parameters described in this chapter for each individual Graphic Object you define Note The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output They are the default values built into the Wholehog libraries for High End Systems consoles Object The Object parameter selects the 3 dimensional object component of an image Object files are the 3 D object shapes used to build a total image The DL 2 graphics engine supports a combined total of 255 stock and user created object files Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be edited DMX values 1 149 are reserved for identifying stock object files User created object files must be assigned a unique DMX value from 150 255 For a reference of 3 D object files available as stock content with your DL 2 fixture and information on how to create your own object files go to the link for the Stock Object Guide on http www highend com support digital lighting dl2supportquide Default DMX
10. maximum red saturation Red color values below the threshold are eliminated Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Blue color values below the threshold are eliminated Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Green color values below the threshold are eliminated 110 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Solarize 4 Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 12 This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and eliminates color above a set threshold Solarize options can create strong highlights Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Red color values above the threshold are eliminated Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Blue color values above the threshold are eliminated Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Green color values above the threshold are eliminated Solid Color RGB M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 16 Solid Color RGB removes the media file texture and allows you to color mix the 3 D object to one solid color Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255
11. 1 Play forward once 2 Pause Stops playback at the frame currently playing Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame 3 Play forward once if opacity gt 0 setting and holds on the last frame Plays only when the content opacity value is greater than zero Plays media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame 4 Play forward if opacity gt 0 setting looping continuously Plays only when the content opacity value is greater than zero 48 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content DMX Value Playback Mode Description Stops playback at the frame currently playing then jumps to 5 Pause and rewind the In Frame setting Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame 6 Scrub In Frame parameter Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame 7 Scrub Out Frame parameter Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame 8 Scrub In Frame with statistics parameter with media file data overlaid on the output Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame 9 Scrub Qut FrameWith statistics parameter with media file data overlaid on the output Scrubbing displays the selected frame of the composite output of the DL 2 fixture While scrubbing the In Frame the frame selected by the In Frame coarse and fine channels will be displayed Likewise scrubbing the Out Frame will display the frame selected b
12. APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 31 Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32 image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area 33 Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center 34 Mod direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture 35 center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center 36 Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center 37 Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast 38 Effect Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity mo Mode 1 Color DeConverge NA o 9 Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 39 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mod3 not used 40 RGB Swap to BGR 41 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme selection
13. Infrared Keystone Top Left X 111 149 Effect 1 Modifier 1 16 Camera Shutter Keystone Top Left Y 112 150 Effect 1 Modifier 2 17 White balance Keystone Top Right X 113 151 Effect 1 Modifier 3 18 Camera Orientation Keystone Top Right Y 114 152 Graphic Effect 2 19 Camera Effects Keystone Bottom Right X 115 153 Effect 2 Modifier 1 20 Red Gain Keystone Bottom Right Y 116 154 Effect 2 Modifier 2 21 Blue Gain Keystone Bottom Left X 117 155 Effect 2 Modifier 3 21 Blue Gain Keystone Bottom Left Y 118 156 X axis rotation X Ratio 119 157 Y Ratio 120 158 A Y axis rotation Viewpoint mode 121 159 122 160 Viewpoint Position X Z sxis rotation 123 161 124 162 Scale X Viewpoint Position Y 125 163 Scale Y T 126 164 Scale Z Vlewpoint Position Z ANS X Position Global Control 128 166 Global Control Modifier 129 167 Y Position 130 168 131 169 us Z Position 132 170 DL 2 User Manual 41 CHAPTER 5 Graphics Engine Overview 42 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content Each Graphic Object s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a media file This chapter outlines how to select an image s object and media file components as well as define the video segment and its playback Selecting Content How Content is Organized The media server on each fixture has a file system that holds the movi
14. Loosen Quarter turn screws to remove top cover and clean it with soap and water Allow it to dry thoroughly before Pre filter replacing Filter bracket Replacing the Fixture Filter Filter A hepa filter and a prefilter are located inside the fixture head and should be replaced when Remove philips screws and lift filter bracket ever they become discolored from particulates or when the Menu displays FILTER Service ERROR or FILTER Service WARN Rear Bezel NN A e TON WAI SA 23 344 ya NI Tilt lock Access the fixture filters 1 Lock the fixture head in the 70 tilt position 2 Unlatch and remove the rear bezel assembly Open Latches to remove 3 Loosen the two quarter turn bezel screws on the top cover and remove the top cover from fixture to clean 4 Slide the top cover back to free it from the front bezel Inspect the filters 5 Lift the prefilter away from the filter bracket 6 Remove the two philips pan screws securing the filter bracket and lift the filter unit off the fixture DL 2 User Manual 159 CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 7 Remove the bracket and lift the HEPA filter out of the filter housing Inspect both the prefilter and the HEPA filter 8 A dirty prefitler can cause an early Service Filter warning If the prefilter looks dirty clean it with water Thoroughly dry the prefilter before proceeding 9 If the HEPA
15. Sales Department Customer Service World Wide Web High End Systems Inc 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA voice 512 836 2242 fax 512 837 5290 Toll Free 800 890 8989 High End Systems Inc 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA voice 800 890 8989 fax 512 834 9195 toll free 800 890 8989 email support highend com http www highend com DL 2 User Manual Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45104 Manufacturer s name High End Systems Inc Distributor s name High End Systems Inc Distributor s address 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin Texas 78758 USA Declares that the product Product Name DL 2 Product Number All Product Options All conforms to the following EEC directives 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Equipment referred to in this declaration of conformity was first manufactured in compliance with the following standards in 2005 Safety EN 60598 1 1997 EN 60598 2 17 1990 A1 A3 1998 A13 1999 EMC EN 55022 Conducted Emissions Class A Radiated Emissions Class A ANSI C63 4 Class A FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A VCCI V 1 2001 04 Class A EN 55024 EN 61000 4 2 4 8kV EN 61000 4 3 Al 3V m EN 61000 4 4 1kV 0 5kV EN 61000 4 5 2kV 1kV EN 61000 4 6 3 Vrms EN 61000 4 11 gt 95 0 5p 30 25p gt 95 250p EN 61000 3 2 Class A EN 61000 3 3 USA Friday July 28 2006 Kenneth Stuart Han
16. 1 Display the User content folder or file in the right pane of the CMA Window 2 Select AutoSet DMX from either the Media Files folder or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to the file or the folder DL 2 User Manual 141 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA You can automatically assign DMX values to all folders at once or to all the files within a folder at once You cannot set both files and folder values at the same time To automatically assign DMX values to all the User content folders or all files within a User content folder 1 Display the User content folders or the files for a single folder in the right pane of the Content Management window and deselect all files or folders 2 Select Autoset All DMX from either the Media Folders or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to all selected files or folders Using the same steps you can also Reset DMX for a single file or folder or Reset All DMX for all display files or folders displayed in the right pane to zero Editing User Content DMX Values You can manually assign any valid DMX value to your files or folders by selecting the file or folder in the right pane and then using the pull down menu or the right click popup selecting Edit DMX A dialog box will allow you to input the DMX value If it is a valid value from 0 255 the CMA will change the DMX v
17. 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation DL 2 User Manual 111 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Geometric Effect Options Cartoon Edge Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 38 Outlines the edges of image components to create a cartoon effect Modifier 1 Adjusts Color reduction from 0 2 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts contrast enhancement from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Adjusts edge detection sensitivity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Collage Generator Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 134 The DL2 collage generator enables multiple DL2 units to create virtually seamless panoramic media projections controlled from a DMX console You can display either stock or custom content The native aspect ratio of one DL 2 fixture s output is 4 3 Some of the arrays configured in conjunction with the collage generator will output a different overall aspect ratio The following table shows suggested configuration specifications Array describes the number of DL2 units positioned horizontally by the number of DL 2 fixtures positioned vertically
18. 32 Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode 33 Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist 34 Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size 35 Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size 36 Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod lens size 37 Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity 38 NA DL 2 User Manual 223 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 39 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 5 RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls s transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod
19. DL 2 DMX Protocol Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around Z axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Z axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z 16384 26 49 122 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around Z axis 32768 50 32768 50 123 circular 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Z axis in 32769 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Z axis slow to fast 65535 Graphic 2 Scaling Minimum object size along X axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along X axis from minimum 4 457 4 49 to actual size 124 Scale X Actual size along X axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along X axis from actual to maximum size 129 254 51 99 Maximum object size along X axis 10 1 255 100 Minimum object size along Y axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along Y axis from minimum to actual size 125 Scale Y Actual size along Y axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along Y axis from actual to maximum size 1 127 1 49 129 254 51 99 Maximum object size along Y axis 10 1 255 100 Minimum object size along Z axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along Z axis from minimum to actual size 126 ScaleZ Actual size along Z axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 I
20. Fixture ID and the DL 2 software version Fixtures derive their IP addresses through a router or automatic IP assignment Fixture Identification The Fixture ID is used in the control protocol to identify specific fixtures for sychronization functions NOTE To ensure that sychronization works properly each fixture should be assigned a unique fixture ID The Management Client Windoui The CMA application s Management Client Window uses a simplified Windows Explorer style user interface with views of the content and configuration of all DL 2 servers connected to the ethernet network You can access options for each view from the drop down menu at the top of the Management Client Window or with a right click in the right pane NOTE You cannot drag folders or files between the left and right panes of the CMA window A Status Bar at the bottom of the page indicates the number of files or folders within a selected folder in the left pane as well as free space on the computer harddrive 136 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Viewing Server Identification Information Selecting the All Server view displays all the DL 2 servers on the fixture network In the following example four servers have been identified on the network The right pane contains the following details in a table format Server ID number defaults to 1 but can be configured in the CMA or in a fixture s Menu system see DMX_Control
21. RGB Swap to BGR 8 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value DMX value invert color 9 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Effect ene gt 10 114 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue NA 0 0 M 2 ae Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 11 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 1e DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 15 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 16 RGB Invert Modi red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to 18 inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green 210 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 114 Effect Mode 2 Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 20 Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search
22. Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Moa3 sets overall color range Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 48 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 63 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 64 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65 Effect Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 72 NA 0 0 Mode 1 Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation m Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation 67 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation 68 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation 69 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation 70 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation 71 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbula
23. Standard protocol requires 170 channels and enables all DL 2 parameters for direct DMX control Dual protocol reduces the fixture footprint to 132 channels by implementing only two graphic objects Single protocol simplifies DL 2 control to a single graphic object and uses 94 channels Select a valid Start Channel in the Start Channel field by using the up and down arrows on the multidirectional button to step through the numbers 1 512 For more information on choosing valid DL 2 DMX Start Channels see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 35 Standard protocol valid start channel 1 343 Dual protocol valid start channel 1 381 Single protocol valid start channels 1 419 DL 2 User Manual 15 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Setup Configuration Using the CMA The Content Management Application running on your computer and linked to DL 2 fixtures via Ethernet lets you remotely configure the DL 2 fixtures For more information on the CMA see Chapter 14 Content Management Application CMA on page 135 To view configuration information for a individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane HighEnd DL2 Management Client Br File Configuration Help HIGH END SYSTEMS SevelD iPAddess Name ae 10 0 1 220 A
24. iris mask closing from outside in 1 129 Round iris closing from inside out 2 130 Rectangle closing from outside in 3 131 Rectangle closing from inside out 4 132 Checkerboard variation 1 5 133 Checkerboard variation 2 6 134 Radial wipe variation 1 7 135 Radial wipe variation 2 8 136 Radial wipe variation 3 9 137 Radial wipe variation 4 10 138 Triangles variation 1 11 139 Triangles variation 2 12 140 Rectangular wrap 13 141 Tiles closing in 14 142 Horizontal doors closing 15 143 Horizontal doors closing from opposing sides 16 144 Vertical doors closing from outside in 17 145 Vertical wipe closing from inside out 18 146 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 1 19 147 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 2 20 148 Vertical panels closing from outside in 1 21 149 Vertical panels closing from outside in 2 22 150 Vertical diamonds 1 23 151 Vertical diamonds 2 24 152 Horizontal diamonds 1 25 153 Horizontal diamonds 2 26 154 Pinwheel 27 155 Oval Iris closing from outside in 28 156 Oval Iris closing from inside out 29 157 Oscillating iris closing from outside in 30 158 Animated dynamic Iris A Global Effect Mode parameter option lets you define a Mask color see Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 on page 82 and on page 139 88 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Mask Size The Mask Size parameter defines mask size for all mask shap
25. screen the CMA see page 152 or from the DMX console see page 128 Camera Communication Error CAMERA COMM ERROR The system is unable to communicate with the Camera Check the Ribbon cable connections at the camera and the head card the Blue side should be facing out Use the camera s zoom buttons to check that the camera has power DL 2 User Manual Issue Filter Missing Error FILTER MISSING ERROR Filter not present Insert Filter see Cleaning and Large Format Message CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Message Detail Service Filter Error Filter needs Servicing Replace Notes Replacing Filters on FILTER SERVICE ERROR Filter NOW page 158 Filter needs Servicing Replace See Cleaning and Filter Service Warning FILTER SERVICE WARN Replacing Filters on Filter SOON page 158 Projector Lamp Life The Lamp has exceeded it s p LAMP LIFE ERROR rated life and must be replaced Error HOW See Replacing the Lamp on page 161 Projector Lamp Life The Lamp is nearing the end of p onpag LAMP LIFE WARN SN Warning it s rated life Replace soon Check the Comm cable connections at i serial port on the back Projector PROJ COMM ERROR The system is unable to of projector and at the Communication Error communicate to the Projector fixture head card Make sure lamp is struck Projector Teripetat r Projector temperature has di aed P PROJ
26. 1 Global Effect 2 Modifier 2 Global Effect 2 Modifier 3 Mask Select Curved Surface Vertical inside corner Mod1 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint 137 Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Curved Surface Vertical outside corner Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical 138 centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Curved Surface Sphere Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 139 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Curved Surface Convex Disk Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 140 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Reserved Defaults to effect 0 141 255 Reserved Defaults to effect 0 133 Collage Mod1 grid style selection Mod2 grid 134 NA 0 0 portion displayed Mod3 edge blend adjustment Reserved Defaults to effect 0 135 255 These Modifier parameters adjust the selected Global Effect 2 parameter option from no adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum adjustment at 255 100 The type of adjustment depends on the particular effect Global Mask Round iris closing from outside in 0 Round iris closing from inside out 1 Rectangle closing from outside in 2 Rectangle closing from inside out 3 Checkerboard variation 1 4 Checkerboard variation 2 5 Radial wipe variation 1 6 Radial wipe variation 2 7 Radial wipe variation 3 8 NA Radial wi
27. 100 of the In Frame value range you can select the beginning of a media file segment as a percentage of the file length Moving from 0 to 100 of the Out Frame value range selects the end of a media file segment as a percentage of the file length Segment Selection Examples Example 1 In Frame Out Frame You can create a segment anywhere between the beginning and the end of a media file The In Frame does not have to precede the Out Frame To skip a segment in the center of a media file set the In Frame to a point following the Example 2 Out Frame The file will play from the In mo o Cl Frame to the end and then start at the begin J Out Frame In Frame I ning of the file and play to the Out Frame When you create a segment in this way you may notice a jump as playback skips from the end of the file to the beginning Start Defining Playback After selecting and defining a media file segment to display on a 3 D object you can choose from several Playback Modes and assign a Playback Speed Playback Mode A Playback Mode parameter for each 3 D image allows several playback options Default DMX Value 0 Plays forward in a continuous loop DMX Value Playback Mode Description Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame setting looping continuously Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame setting and holds on the last frame O Play forward looping
28. 2 adjustment at 255 100 The type of 116 Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect 0 255 1 100 0 0 Effect Mode 2 Note for some effects one or more modifiers 117 Modifier 3 may not be used 0 255 1 100 0 0 Graphic 2 Rotation Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around X axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 X axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around X 16384 4g 118 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around X axis 32768 50 32768 50 vertical flip 119 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769 51 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around X axis slow to fast 65535 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around Y axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Y axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y 16384 56 4g 120 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 O rotation around Y axis 32768 50 32768 50 horizontal flip 121 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769 51 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Y axis slow to fast 65535 DL 2 User Manual 213 APPENDIX A
29. 2 fixture has been optimized for lighting applications This option lets you make the same adjustments for User content or camera input Content Optimization adjusts the image Black level and Contrast to optimize the projected image for your performance environment You can use it to easily modify the black level and contrast for a specific application The Exposure Control option provides an alternative algorithm for accomplishing this optimization Modifier 1 Adjusts black level from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full black Modifier 2 Adjusts contrast from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 for maximum contrast Tip All the factory content provided has been optimized already This parameter is especially useful for optimizing User content or camera capture DL 2 User Manual 65 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Push to Sepia Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 2 This option converts all color in the image to sepia tones Modifier 1 Fades from original color at a DMX value O to a range of sepia shades at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts color saturation from no adjustment at a DMX value 0 to full saturation at a value of 255 100 Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 2 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 2 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 2 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 2255 100 66 DL 2
30. Blue values are unaffected Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to red from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 No change to blue color component RGB Swap to RBG Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 42 This option allows you to swap colors All green values become blue and all blue values become green Red values are unaffected Modifier 1 No change to red color component Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to blue from O no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 red Scan Line Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 32 Maps image color intensities to the colors in a single horizontal line of the selected texture Modifier 1 Selects a line of the media file to scan Modifier 2 Adjusts the mapping transition Modifier 3 Not used DL 2 User Manual 109 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Solarize Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 9 This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and inverts the color below a set threshold Solarize options can create strong highlights Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation R
31. Channel is the first channel of a fixture s channel range on a DMX link There are 512 available channels on each DMX universe divided among all the devices in a particular universe A fixture must have a unique DMX Start Channel number in order to respond independently to controller commands To determine each fixture s DMX Start Channel identify the footprint of every fixture on the universe The fixture s footprint is the number of consecutive DMX channels a fixture requires and is determined by the channels in the fixture s protocol The fixture s DMX channel range must not overlap any other device s channel range on the link When two devices on the same DMX universe have overlapping channel ranges one or both devices will be disabled or behave erratically 8 bit vs l6 bit DMX Parameters Most parameters of an automated light use one channel of DMX providing 256 values of control 0 255 This is known as 8 bit DMX Although most DL 2 parameters use 8 bit DMX several require a more accurate range of values than can be provided with a single DMX channel DL 2 User Manual 35 CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics By utilizing two DMX channels for a single parameter 65535 values become available for controlling and adjusting parameter functions This is known as 16 bit DMX You can adjust 16 bit DMX values in both coarse and fine increments The first channel of the pair provides coarse control changes of the DMX value in increments of
32. Cord Cap coococccncncncncononcnnnnnnnna m memes eme nemen 6 Installing a Line Cord Cap U K Only sssssesses mme 6 Vatic Fitter Heads Information Danmark ssssss eee eee nana ee ea en ene es 6 Back Panel CONNECTIONS sustancias 6 Mounting the Fixture ie iesu ere eremo me eh cata EXE EE RENE POSU POOL e gU E HY a RET PE aa AES 8 Fog Machine Warning sssocsiooe cider ec eben p ort ED Rd Eee PUT EDO US 8 Mounting the Fixture Upright sssssss memes 9 Tr ssMOUnting etaient Dodo A A Ate eH 9 DL 2 User Manual Linking DL 2 Fixtures cui Rey ERR Eee e A a Ve ARES EELENE T 10 Setting up a Standard DMX Link cece cece eee eee Immer 10 Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link 21 0 0 cece eee m meer 11 Einking Conflgurationis iia ede retrieve er E E re ee To Foe ur VERRE ERR 11 Powering On the Fixture sani aiena aiaia eaea ene hens essen nnne 12 Homing the Fixt re 2 eo eue eer eee etin neve rr ox Ex Ye va greet ea vla e e e E 12 Viewing the Display Panel sssssssssssssm Ime emen nen 13 Software Setup e cmccocococacacacacananannnnnnnnnnnnnnnanrnrnrnrn rara rararanancnrararararanananananananass 14 Verifying and Uploading Fixture Software sssssssssss mne 14 Installing and Launching the Content Management Application CMA 14 Config ririg DIL 2 Fixtures esmas erat 15 Setup Configuration Using the Menu System sessssss 15 Setup Config
33. DMX values 0 15 step through grid pattern selected by the Modifier 1 parameter DMX values 16 255 default to the upper left corner of the grid DL 2 User Manual 113 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 3 Adjusts edge blending between the selected portion of the image being projected by the fixture and adjacent portions being projected by other fixtures DMX Value Action 0 127 Adjusts the intensity of the blended areas only This is to have the ability to compensate for any hotspots that may occur in the blended areas 128 160 Displays the DL 2 output in its cropped state but without edge blending applied 161 191 Displays the DL 2 output in its cropped state without edge blending but covering the full output of the projector 192 199 Displays default alignment pattern in rectangular area with no blending 200 207 Displays default alignment pattern in rectangular area with no blending covering full projector output 208 223 Displays collage selection grid over default alignment pattern 224 255 Displays collage selection grid over selected image movie Curved Surface Support Object Effect Global Effect DL 2 Curved Surface Support corrects for shape distortions resulting from projecting onto surfaces that aren t flat This Global effect option facilitates projecting onto convex or concave cylinders angular screens spheres and disk shaped surfaces You can apply this cor
34. EA 13 63 197 77 C5 36 33 160 63 AO 2 09 233 91 E9 14 10 196 77 C4 37 09 159 62 9F 2 27 232 91 E8 14 58 195 76 C3 37 87 158 62 9E 2 46 231 91 E7 15 07 194 76 C2 38 65 157 62 9D 2 66 230 90 E6 15 56 193 76 C1 39 44 156 61 9C 2 86 229 90 E5 16 06 192 75 CO 39 44v 156 61 9C 3 07 228 89 E4 16 57 191 75 BF 40 23 155 61 9B 3 29 227 89 ES 17 09 190 75 BE 41 04 154 60 9A 3 52 226 89 E2 17 61 189 74 BD 41 85 153 60 99 3 76 225 88 E1 18 14 188 74 BC 42 68 152 60 98 4 00 224 88 EO 18 68 187 73 BB 43 50 151 59 97 4 25 223 87 DF 19 23 186 73 BA 44 34 150 59 96 4 52 222 87 DE 19 79 185 73 B9 45 19 149 58 95 4 78 221 87 DD 20 36 184 72 B8 46 04 148 58 94 5 06 220 86 DC 20 93 183 72 B7 46 90 147 58 93 5 34 219 86 DB 21 51 182 71 B6 47 77 146 57 92 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX B MSpeed Conversion Table DO PY PY OIN N CO A A A 01 O1 O1 O O NI NINI OO CO CO O1 D N 01 GD 00 230 DL 2 User Manual Appendix C Custom User Content There are several considerations to keep in mind when creating custom content to control with the DL 2 graphics engine software Read the following specifications and recommendations before creating custom content If a file is not DL2 compatible it may load but not appear as output The CMA thumbnai
35. Effect Mode Options Descriptions Sinewave Horizontal w X axis Wobbulation object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 67 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the x axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset Sinewave Horizontal w Y axis Wobbulation Y object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 68 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the y axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset Sinewave Horizontal w Z axis Wobbulation M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 69 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the z axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a textu
36. Exposure Control eter ME 73 Invert Black and White Keep Color sess nn 73 Texture iMIXIBQ 2 re e Eee Ad dan 73 Effect 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode c oconononncnonnnonanonannnnnnnncnrarararararananananananannss 74 Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content After designating a master fixture with the Sync To parameter you can synchronize the content of other fixtures to any Object on the master in terms of playback time rotation or both Synchronization Parameters cccoonoconnncnnnnncncnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnanennas 79 SYNE Mode ERRORS 79 Playback TIMING sr Aoi 79 A TA 80 Chapter 10 Global Functions Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining two or three separate object graphics You can adjust intensity define masks select a point in space to view the composite image and control keystone correction Global Intensity ocmocncnnnncnonacononncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnnrnnnnrnnrn cnn rnnrnrnnranennnnrnnanennas 81 Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 ooocococonnnnnnononononanannnnnnnncararararanananes 82 Global Control cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueueueueueueuauauaueuauaeaeeeeeeeeauauaueeeeeeesegegugugns 85 Four in One Control Option iisi 0 c cece eee eee eme semen eese hse nns 85 On Screen Frame Statistics casio ira edat ag rede danas 87 Masking Control eeseeseiesseiseseisesea annnm unen an annua naui nianus nnn n nnn 88 Mask Shape Se
37. Management Client HIGH END SYSTEMS 8 Al Servers 4 servers Server ID LIP Address Name Value 12 182 168 1 108 Ast Net Subnet 0 C User Content 12 192 168 1 108 Ast Net Urevesse 0 O User Objects 12 192 168 1 108 Disk Free Space 45546 C Stock Content 2 1921681108 DMX Protocol Enhanced Stock Objects 2 1921681 108 Feature ID 2 1 2 192 168 1 108 Pathport Universe 0 4g one fl 2 1921581108 DMX Source DMX512 p ien 12 1921681108 Start Charnel 000 brian 5 p2 192 168 1 108 Data Loss Timeout his Long D Al Corfiguraton 12 182168 1 108 Data Loss Timeout Shutdown Long 192 168 1 108 Display Invert Of 12 192 168 1 108 Display Level On 12 192169 1 108 Fodure Delaults On 12 192 168 1 108 Fixture Hours 150 p2 182 168 1 108 Fidwe Hours Reset 0 l2 19216811008 Model Mac OS X Viewing Server Configuration To access Server Configuration information for an individual server select the Configuration option under the individual server To view configuration information for all Servers on the network select All Configurations in the left pane The right pane now displays configuration values for all the DL 2 servers on the fixture link in a sortable table Click in the column heading to sort by that column s values A symbol appears in the sort by column heading diting Configuration Values The Configuration table viewed in the right pane of the CMA window contains the following
38. Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow NA 0 0 CMY adds to non black pixels Increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green 4 Mod3 blue DL 2 User Manual 183 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol RGB Add 2 all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red 6 Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR Mod1 red Mod2 green 7 Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BRG Mod1 red 8 Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 If color value lt DMX value invert 9 color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 If color value gt DMX invert color 10 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 3 If color value lt DMX set color to 0 11 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 If color value gt DMX set color to 0 12 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 gt blue DotP and Resample Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 13 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod blue All or nothing Mod1 red Mod2 green 27 Global Mod3 blue If color value gt mod value 15 NA o lo Effect 2 color 255 else color 0 Solid color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green 16 Mod3 blue RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to inverted green Mod3 blue to 17 inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue 18 Mod blue to inverted red RGB Inver
39. Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 15 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB 16 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to 18 inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green 110 Effect Edge Detect Color NA 0 0 Mode 1 Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search 20 size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 21 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Texture Ripple Horizontal 22 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular 24 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular 25 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using 26 Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 27 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DL 2 User Manual 207
40. RGB To revert back to the Menu display press one of the six POWER MANAGEMENT OFF side menu buttons When the Projector Control Menu is LOGO OFF set to Off the projector control menu is not displayed ON START OFF FANSPEED NORMAL Turning Projector Defaults On will reset all the LAMP_MODE NORMAL options on the Projector tab to their factory default DISPLAY OFF settings For more information refer to the Projector BLUE BACKGROUND BH F gt f R_CODE 001 User Manual that shipped with your DL 2 fixture File Screen DHA TopMac The File screen displays information about eel HES_Atmo the currently selected content file Use this H amn aum HES Core ad screen to preview content both still images HES Digital A HFS Pinital A m am and movies When you select the File tab the file plays in the window to the left The bottom right window displays content folders and highlights the current file location You can scroll through the Content folders and the files inside each folder to preview any content file Aerial Effect 012 Aerial Effect 015 Aerial Effect 060 EE O A grist Erect 061 gt Aerial Effect 108 Alarm Gear mba El DMX Value 2 Contains 108 files 30 DL 2 User Manual Test Tab Test_Home Screen Homing sets a fixture to it s default posi tioning The fixture automatically homes whenever it is connected to power You can manually home all or separate mechanical functions usin
41. Screen on page 25 Server Name is a name you assign to a fixture IP Address is assigned to that fixture by the router or Auto IP Software Version Number Model identifies the fixture type HighEnd DE2 Management Client File Servers Help HIGH ND SYSTEMS AI Servers 4 servers Model Ig brian 5 brian 192 168 1 106 1 0 0 206 DL2 J three 3 two 192 168 1 108 1 00218 DL2 one 1 three 192 168 1 103 1 0 0218 DL2 Y won one 192 168 1 104 1 00218 Axon All Configuration Note Clicking in a column heading sorts the table according to the values in that column In the All Server view the drop down menu or a right click on a server in the right pane gives you the these options Refresh the screen e Clone Content replicates the server s user content to one or more other servers on the network see page 148 Delete Content removes all the user content from the server Create Content Archive lets you back up all the server s user content to a compressed file see page 147 Deploy Content Archive restores user content to the server from the backup see page 147 Upgrade Software allows you to upgrade fixture software For more information on upgrade options see Upgrading Software on page 149 DL 2 User Manual 137 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Client Window Content Organization The media server on each fixture has a file system that holds
42. TEMP ERROR exceeded operational range and Cool fi dth has shutdown ool ixture and then Proiector Ti i Proiector i ded restrike the lamp rojector Temperature PROJ TEMP WARN rojector is over recommende Warning USB port Communication Error USB INIT ERROR operating temperature The PC failed to initialize USB communication with the box card USB port Security Error USB SECURE ERROR System State LEDs Five labeled LEDs on the display panel indicate the following system activity USB failed to pass the hardware security test Contact High End Systems Customer Support Name Color State Description Projector White On Projector lamp is on Off Projector lamp is off Blinking Projector lamp is either cooling down or in a indeterminate state Status Green On 45 sec On 1 4 sec Off Running normal motion control code Blinking Board communication activity for example during a software upload Blinking Slowly 320 processor card in the base housing is receiving code Drive Amber Blinking Hard drive activity Server Blue Steady Internal computer is receiving power Power Red Steady Fixture s Motion Control system is receiving power DL 2 User Manual 167 CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Board LED States LEDs located on DL 2 fixture boards indicate how the unit is functioning The following Table lists LED States and problems they may indicate
43. User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Push to Red Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 This option reduces colors in the selected image to all Red values Modifier 1 Fades from original color at a DMX value 0 to a range of red tones at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts color saturation from no adjustment at a DMX value 0 to full saturation at a value of 255 100 Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 Rl an i E i r Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 DL 2 User Manual 67 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Gray maker Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 This effect gradually transitions the color image to a grayscale image Use the Gray Maker effect when you want to add an undertone of grey to the colors in an image NOTE If content is already grayscale there is no effect applied but Modifier 2 can still effect image contrast Modifier 1 At a DMX value of 0 the image will be full color As you increase the DMX value more gray is introduced until at a DMX value of 255 all color has been replaced with shades of gray Modifier 2 Adjusts the brightness of the image at the grayscale transition level selected with the Modifier 1 parameter Original Content Visual Mode Parame
44. Y 36 Using DL 2 Servers with a WholeHog Console eene 36 Adding a FIXtUFe cose eterne eee ore green daa av evens TE DOO Dee ri me Pe ERR MESTULET UNE 36 DMX Output DiSplayS visionar QUU PX IUE P RCISRAQ ARA ER EE Ot goons 36 IgM sen aidia dd 37 Wholehog III Programming Notes oocccnonocnonncnnnacnnnacnnnncnnnnnononarannnrnnnnrannnnaos 37 Play Speed ooo I eve Or Rr rm ARR a E EO P Vere VERRE VE UIS 37 Mask Strob A eara ea n n etel i ve inet e Ta e 37 Play Modes Opacity 5 ederet ve eck eterne re ee eee ente x ee ede UAE eben dente deg 37 CMY etra iE AS dead deu mte AS 37 Control Channel EUnGCtions xii a Aaa 37 Chapter 5 Graphics Engine Overview The DL 2 fixture s graphic engine software gives you control over content selection playback 3 D environment you will use to select image and project 3 D Video Lighting Content Working in the DL 2 3 D Environment coonocncnncnnnonannnonncnnnncnnnncnnancnnanennanennas 39 Image Optimizing Controls c ooononnnononononnnnnnnnnacacanacananananancararararananacanananananss 39 Graphics Control Hierarchy eese nenne nennen nnn nhan nana una ann 39 Graphics Engine Functions eese nennen nnne nene nn nina nana nna na ann 40 Object Graphic FUN CONS iis eerte tetto Ver v RE KIA Ne de oed bed ve vg eet dodi 40 Global FUNCIONS srein dada dn atas data ud entia ense ped Qd dd ERE CR eI M et Mr ei ede 40 Making Graphics Effect Choices c omm
45. Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 31 A chromakey removes a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values The Inverse Chromakey Coarse parameter selects a color range 40 either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as chromakeyed Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from 0 no green to 255 10096 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Chromakey Fine Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 26 A chromakey removes a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values The Chromakey Fine parameter selects a color range 15 either side of the defined value Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from 0 no green to 255 10096 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defi
46. allow you to control and apply effects to the Internal camera input Camera Zoom The Camera Zoom parameter uses two DMX channels to provide 16 bit control of the camera s zoom function This includes an 18x optical and 12x digital zoom for a total of 216x combined zoom range You can adjust the Camera Zoom parameter from In DMX value 0 to Out DMX value 65535 Camera Focus The Camera Focus parameter uses two DMX channels to provide 16 bit control of the camera s focus function Auto focus for the camera is active when DMX values 0 511 The camera focus can also be manually adjusted from In Far End DMX value 512 to Out Near End DMX value 65535 IR Illuminator The DL 2 fixture is equipped with an illuminator that can output infrared IR light The IR Illuminator parameter controls both the IR illuminator output and the camera s infrared sensing option DMX values 0 63 turn the illuminator off and set the camera to sense the visible light spectrum From DMX values 64 127 the illuminator remains off but the camera s Auto IR function is ON detecting ambient infrared light in the environment The rest of the DMX range turns the Auto adjustment off and adjusts the amount of IR illuminator output from FULL DMX value 128 to OFF DMX value 255 DL 2 User Manual 133 CHAPTER 13 Live Video Input and Control Camera Shutter The DL 2 fixture s internal camera can create slow motion and choppy frame effects usi
47. axis Wobbulation 64 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation 66 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation 67 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation 68 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 200 DL 2 User Manual 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 Effect Mode 2 Effect Mode 2 Modifier 1 Effect Mode 2 Modifier 2 Effect Mode 2 Modifier 3 X axis Rotation vertical flip 16 bit adjustment Y axis Rotation horizontal flip 16 bit adjustment Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset oa Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation 70 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation 71 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation 72 NA Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 73 Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 Blue cycle 74 speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 255 Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no o 555 1 100 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum adjustment at 255 100 The typ
48. channels Single Motion global 1 object 94 channels Fixture ID 11 255 Assigns the fixture a unique number on fixture network Start 1 512 Sets the fixture s DMX start channel Channel Main Table Displays DMX values for all 512 DMX link channels in rows of values Offset Scrolls through rows of DMX values Baw view iod 0 44 Times second for refreshing displayed values Refresh On DMX values updated instantly Timer Off Display does not refresh Motion Displays fixture Movement and Camera parameter values Displays Intensity Iris Edge Fade Viewpoint and Protocol Global Keystone correction parameters values for the View composite image oe Displays Position Rotation Scaling and Effects Obj 3 parameters values for the selected graphic object Pan Invert On Inverts the direction of the pan motor Off Default Tilt Invert On Inverts the direction of the Tilt motor Off Default Pan Tilt On Swaps Pan and Tilt directions Swap Off Default Data Loss Long Closes iris after a 5 minute DMX data loss Fixture Timeout Iris Short Closes iris after a 5 second DMX data loss On Default intensity Note Unless you select Off adjustment you can adjust display Display Preview Displays current intensity level content preview Off Turns off display after a period of time Display On Inverts menu display and navigation livert Off Turns off the display invert Auto Automatically inverts display gt 45 22 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 3 T
49. filter is discolored with particulates replace it with the part listed in Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 3 Reassemble the Fixture 10 Reinstall the HEPA Filter with the rubber gasket down 11 Reattach the filter bracket with the two philips pan screws Place HEPA filter with gasket 12 Replace the prefilter over the bracket on velcro against plenum tabs 13 Replace the top cover fastening it with the two quarter turn screws 14 Carefully replace the rear bezel making sure to position but do not force the gasket against the lamp cover located on the back of the projector and Relatch the rear bezel assembly Cleaning the Internal Projector Filter Internal projector air filters prevent dust from accumulating on surface of Projection Lens and Projection Mirror If the projector Air Filter becomes Filter clogged with dust particles it will reduce the cooling Removal fans effectiveness and may result in an internal heat Tool build up that can shorten projector life Projector Clean the projector air filter using the following steps Filters 1 Disconnect the fixture from power 2 Rotate and lock the fixture head in the or 90 tilt position 3 Unlatch and remove the rear bezel 4 Loosen two quarter turn screws to remove the bottom cover and locate the filter removal tool mounted on the chassis 160 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 L
50. fixtures to your local drive Drag and Drop Copy and Paste commands Cloning transfers the User Content files and their DMX value assignments from one DL 2 server to other server s on the fixture network Creating a Content Archive Deploying a Content Archive Use the following table to determine the best method for your situation Transfer Type _ Fixture Network From Server From Client Between File Transfer Method to Client Machine to Networked Machine Server s DL 2 Server s Yes if format is valid for destination Does NOT preserve DMX folder Values Drag and Drop Copy and Paste commands ee Clone No Preserves DMX values F and Replaces any ao Content previous User Content FeDIMe on destination drive Saves assigned DMX Creating a Content values when creating Archive archive from content on a fixture DL 2 User Manual 143 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Downloading Content from a DL 2 Fixture to Your Local Drive The CMA supports downloading User content files or folders from a DL 2 fixture to your local drive To download a file or folder of User Content 1 Display the Folder or File that you wish to move in the right pane of the CMA window 2 If the destination for the file on your local drive is visible you can simply drag and drop the folder or file to that location or an external drive connected to your computer OR 3 Select Copy from th
51. from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum cyan saturation Modifier 2 Increases magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum magenta saturation Modifier 3 Increases yellow color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum yellow saturation CMY Add All Pixels M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 2 This effect increases color values across all pixels including black pixels Modifier 1 Increases cyan color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum cyan saturation Modifier 2 Increases magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum magenta saturation Modifier 3 Increases yellow color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum yellow saturation CMY Add Non black Pixels Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 3 This effect increases color values across all pixels except black pixels Modifier 1 Increases Cyan color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases Magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 3 Increases Yellow color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation DL 2 User Manual 101 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Color Cycle Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 14 The imag
52. from O no fade to 255 100 opaque t Original Content 100 Left Edge Fade l 100 Top Bottom Left Right Edge Fade DL 2 User Manual 91 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Keystone Correction Parameters When an image is output from a Top Left X Top Right X DL 2 fixture at an angle the image may appear skewed Eight Keystone parameters adjust the Top image shape and compensate for Right Y this effect You can control each of the four corners of the graphics output to reshape your image to a form that projects correctly Bottom Right Y Default DMX Value 0 no keystone correction has been Bottom Left X applied Bottom Right X Original Content Each corner has an x and a y value that adjust and correct scale of the projection from any corner toward the image center on that axis Setting all Keystone X and Y parameters DMX values to zero will place the four corners of the image at the four corners of the projector output Adjusting keystone x values toward 255 10096 moves the respective corner x positions horizontally toward the center of that image edge Adjusting keystone y values toward 255 10096 causes the respective corner y positions to be moved vertically toward the center of that edge of the image Tip These parameters can also be used to create interesting skewing as a design effect Keystone Top Left X DMX value 85 Keystone Top Right Y DMX value 170 Keystone Top Left Y DMX value 85 A
53. image Color Effects including edge colors allow for combined image color mixing Multiple Mask selections with edge fading and strobe effects Edge fading for creating montages Keystone correction on output projection Viewpoint controls provide ability to change viewing angle perspective on images Multiple modes for synchronizing all networked DL 2 fixtures Content Management Application Available for Windows and Mac operating systems Communicates with DL 2 fixtures over an Ethernet network Uploads and downloads custom digital content to DL 2 fixtures Configures DL 2 fixtures with remote control of all menu commands Updates software including content applications and operating system to DL 2 fixtures Harduiare 17 Motion Parameters for mechanical fixture control include Mechanical Iris adjustment to full black out 400 degree Pan and 240 degree Tilt movement DMX control of projector zoom and focus DMX control of camera functions Integrated digital camera feeds digital video capture directly into the graphic engine that provides Optical 4 digital zoom to increase image up to 216x Options for 1 30 frame captures sec Vertical and or Horizontal image inversion DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 1 Product Overview Black and White Color Negative and Freeze Frame effects White Balance including Red and Blue gain control Infrared illuminator allows video capture even in blackout settings Remo
54. image created by combining multiple objects Motion parameters control the fixture movement and projection as well as live video feed from the internal camera It is especially important to keep this in mind when applying graphical effects At the lowest level Layer effects are applied to individual 3 D layers Any Global effects applied affect each object in the combined Object image Finally motion effects control the projection of the composite image DL 2 User Manual 39 CHAPTER 5 Graphics Engine Overview Graphics Engine Functions Object Graphic Functions For an individual object you can control The media file and 3 D object selection for the layer Media playback including What portion of the movie plays Playback speed Playback mode direction and style of playback The object transparency opacity Visual Effects including colormixing and geometric effects Synchronization Image Rotation Scale and Position Global Functions Global controls are applied to composite image created by multiple 3 D images For the combined image you can Adjust the composite image intensity level Apply visual effects including colormixing and geometric effects Select a mask shape size it and apply edge fades and color to the mask Apply and color mix an image edge fade Control keystone correction Establish the point in 3 D space from which image will be viewed Making Graphics ffect Choice
55. information for one or all servers The server ID from 1 255 The IP Address The configuration item name The current option setting 152 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA A right click on a item will popup a list including Refresh Edit or Reset You can also double click an item to bring up the edit dialog box The Edit dialog box lets you choose between available options for that item 2 HighEnd DL2 Management Client File Configuration Help HIGH END SYSTEMS 101 x B All Servers 1 server B B Susan 2 H O User Content User Objects Stock Content Stock Objects All Configuration INN no ro SevelD IPAddess Name 1 Vae l 192 168 50 227 Fixture Hours 150 192 168 50 227 Fixture Hours Reset 192 168 502 Model 192 168 50 2 Fixture Name 192 168 5022 Homelris Zoom Foc Refresh 192 168 50 227 Home Motion 192 168 50 227 Home Pan Tilt Off 192 168 50 227 Lamp Hours Reset 150 192 168 50 227 Lamp Hours Reset 46 466 ro 2 5 The following table shows the configuration values available for viewing and or editing Note Read Only options are for information display only and cannot be edited If you select or type in an option that is invalid the OK button will be grayed out and not selectable Configuration Item Configuration Value Options Art Net Subnet 0 16 Art Net
56. launching the Content Management Application CMA and configuration options Harduiare Setup Unpacking the Fixture Your DL 2 fixture ships in a road case specifically designed to protect the product during transport When unpacking inspect both the outside of the fixture and the projector for physical damage to components Your DL 2 fixture ships with the following One DL 2 fixture in road case Two mounting brackets One safety cable Documentation CD that contains CMA application User Manual in pdf format Fixture software Recovery software image High End Systems assumes no responsibility for products that are damaged during transport Return a product for repair in its road case Before sending anything to the factory call your High End Systems dealer distributor for a Return Material Authorization RMA number The factory cannot accept any goods shipped without an RMA number Pan and Tilt Locking The DL 2 fixture ships with pan and tilt latches locked You can unlock adjust these latches to stabilize the fixture for mounting Tilt Lock Nv Pan Lock L 2 User Manual 5 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Attaching a Power Cord Cap The DL 2 fixture ships with an SJT power cord Use the information in this section to replace the power cord cap for locations with another electrical standard Different locations even within the same country may requi
57. laws and how they apply to content used with the DL 2 fixture By Suzy Vaughan Associates for High End Systems I want to use a film clip from When Harry Met Sally in a promotional piece advertising my services What do have to do to be able to do that First of all you need to obtain permission to use the clip from its owners The clip is considered intellectual property just as though it were your car or some software code developed by and belonging to Microsoft This is because the U S Copyright Act gave creators of literary works which include books films television programs art works still photos and musical compositions and recordings the right to sell or license these works and to make money from them for the period of the copyright But what about public domain material heard that lots of material is in the public domain and can be used for free Once the copyright runs out the creative work falls into the public domain and can be used freely by anyone without payment or licensing If the work is not public domain it is considered literary property The Copyright Act provides substantial penalties for copyright infringement ranging from 10 000 for accidental infringement to 250 000 for willful infringement However contrary to popular belief there really is not that much material in the public domain so this approach will limit you creatively What if want to use a clip in a public performance It s not being film
58. liquid surface speed generator raindrop rate 47 RGB Scale varies color value Red Green Blue 49 Color to Alpha Red to alpha Green to alpha Blue to alpha 50 Color to Alpha Inverted e tl fa ee b Selects Selects Crossfade 51 Texture Mixing Source Source Effect Between Texture Level Textures 128 Fn ME applies color to a selected mask Red Gen Blue 129 Ed iris color to a selected Red Green Blue Mask Color and Edge Fade Color applies the 130 same color to both the selected Mask and Red Green Blue Image Edge Fade parameters 131 Background Color selects background color Red Green Blue 84 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Effect Mode Adjustments DMX m ies im Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier 2 Modifier 3 Value Background Color Cycle sequences the 132 3 y 3 Red Speed Green Speed Blue Speed background color Collage Generator allows a fixture to displa Select ti A s P Y Selects Array i sl SPATSA Adjusts Edge 134 a portion of the output to create multi fixture of image to i Type blending panorama displays display Curved Surface Vertical Convex Cylinder Adjusts Adjusts 135 ee Not Used corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Vertical Center 136 Curved Surface Vertical Concave Cylinder Adjusts Adjusts Horizontal corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Vertical Center Center 137 Curved Surface Vertical Inside Corner Adjusts Adjus
59. or Save the application Pressing Run automatically un installs any existing CMA version on your hard drive and installs the new version Upgrading DL 2 Fixture Software DL 2 fixture software can only be uploaded to fixtures from the CMA You must first save the latest version of the DL 2 fixture software from the High End Systems website ww w highend com to your hard drive and then use the CMA to upload it to the fixtures on your link To Upgrade DL 2 Fixture Software 1 Using your internet browser select the latest version from the support section of the High End Systems website A dialog box will give you the option to Save 2 Select the location and press Save again to put a copy of the Fixture software on your local drive 3 Click on All Servers in the left pane of CMA Management window 4 Right click anywhere in the CMA Window or use the Server s pull down menu to select Upgrade Software The Upgrade Wizard will prompt you to browse to the location where you saved a copy of latest version 5 After locating the upgrade file press Next The Upgrade Wizard displays a list of all servers connected to the fixture network 150 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA 6 Click in the box to the left of the server name to select a server s for upgrading Upgrade Wizard HIGH END SYSTEMS Choose the servers lo uporade Name IP Address More 10 10 10 1 O fou 10 10 10 10 O Axon 10 10 10 107
60. programs on your computer when using the CMA 14 DL 2 User Manual Configuring DL 2 Fixtures CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Before programming the DL 2 fixtures from a DMX512 console you need to Identify the DMX Source for the fixture Select the Protocol type to determine the DMX channel range this fixture will utilize Select a Fixture Number to identify this fixture on the DL 2 fixture link required if you will be synchronizing output between fixtures Assign a valid Start Channel the first channel in the unique range of DMX channels designated by the console for this fixture You can configure fixtures directly using the DL 2 menu system or remotely using the Content Management Application Setup Configuration Using the Menu System All setup parameters are located on the DL2 fixture s menu DMX Screen For detailed information on using the DL 2 Menu System see Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System on page page 19 DMX Source defines the source of DMX data and has two options e DMX512 Data is transmitted over standard DMX cables Art Net Data is transmitted over Ethernet cables using the Art Net protocol Set the number of DMX Universes and Source DMX512 Protocol Start s Standard Channel Fixture ID 1 Set DMX Raw Protocol Control File Rst Test Info DL 2 Ethernet Subnetworks containing this fixture from 0 16 Choose from three DMX Protocol types
61. raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 47 Mod2 and Mod3 sets overall color range Reserved Defaults to effect 0 48 Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha 49 Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 27 Global Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 Effect 2 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 127 Mask color Mod1 red Mod2 green 128 Mod3 blue Edge fade color Mod1 red Mod2 green 129 Mod3 blue Mask color and Edge fade color Mod1 red 130 Mod2 green Mod3 blue Background Color Mod1 red Mod2 green 131 Mod3 blue Background Color Cycle Mod1 red speed 132 Mod2 green speed Mod3 blue speed Reserved Defaults to effect 0 133 Collage Mod1 grid style selection Mod2 grid 134 portion displayed Mod3 edge blend adjustment Curved Surface Vertical convex cylinder Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint 135 Mod3 Not used Curved Surface Vertical concave cylinder Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical 136 centerpoint Mod3 Not used 186 DL 2 User Manual 27 29 30 31 Global Effect 2 Global Effect 2 Modifier
62. rotation direction and speed along with it s position and scale in x y and z axis directions Rotating a 3 D Object oonccncnoconnnnannncannncannncnnnncnnnnnrncnnrnnnnrncnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnans 51 Rotation Parameters ocoonocnnnncnnnonannncnnnncnnnnrnnnnrnnnnennnnrnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrncnnrananenos 53 O op 53 A P M 54 Pad ROCAL OM dies fo ava A A e 55 Scaling the Object ooomonncnonncnonacnnnncnonannnrncnnrncnnrncnnnnnrnnnnrnnrnrnnnnrnnrnrnnrncnnancanans 56 X Scale ined ce tote ecu ec Quiet dati ee dal mia piene nt dddeddeda dad ute eae tcs 56 Bere PES 57 Z Scalg ite ada dada Second 58 Changing Object Position omoncnnnononononannnnnnnnnacacananananancncarararacaranacananananananess 59 X POSIEOD sioe ee ee conten T de A ee TM Dd do adeat dede eMe duet 59 Y POSICION sisssssvevevee onde oed stem RR SR E ER UE a c 60 Z doiiiu o aec EU 61 xii DL 2 User Manual Chapter 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects You can adjust opacity and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric effects to each individual Graphic Object Opacity PPP 63 Visual Mode cccccceeeccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueueueueueuauauauauauauauauauauaeeeaeeeaeaguaueuenenenas 64 Content Optimization ii a A D acid ee 65 PUSO Split ai 66 PUSH tO Red ii A a ea ea 67 Gr y maker T ca edit AN ere ee e eek naa ERR AONE Rew dete e E e E BERE Re d dies 68 Gray Maker dc p 69 POST FIZE PME 70 Color to B W METER 71 Fire Gradlef 5 O O 71 Negative AT TUUM 72
63. size along X axis 10 1 255 100 Minimum object size along Y axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 4 457 4 49 to actual size 163 Scale Y Actual size along Y axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along Y axis from actual to 459 254 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along Y axis 10 1 255 100 Minimum object size along Z axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 4 457 4_49 to actual size 164 Scale Z Actual size along Z axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along Z axis from actual to 459 054 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along Z axis 10 1 255 100 226 DL 2 User Manual 165 166 X Position Graphic 3 Position Moves object left from center of display APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 32768 50 Moves object down from center of display Centers object along X axis in display 32768 50 Moves object right from center of display pus 167 F ne Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768 50 32768 50 168 36769 Moves object up from center of display 65535 51 100 Moves object nearer from center of display 0 36767 0 49 169 E Z Position Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 32768 50 170 Moves object back along Z axis at center of display DL 2 User Manual 227 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 228 DL 2 User Manual Appendix B MSpeed Conv
64. texture from a DMX value of 0 fully transparent to 255 100 fully opaque TIP You can create a modified Trails effect with the Texture Mixing option using the following steps 1 Select two Graphic Objects The second object can be a solid black screen Media Folder 1 Media File 1 2 Use Modifier 1 to select the Graphic Object you want to display with a trail effect 3 Set Modifier 2 to a DMX Value 2 4 Set Modifer 3 in a range between a DMX value of 240 254 The closer to 254 the more exagerated the trail effect appears If Modifier 3 is set to 255 the output will appear to stall or freeze on an image DL 2 User Manual 121 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 25 This option varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the z axis without affecting the underlying object to create an effect of wavy ripples moving out from the object s center Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest spee
65. the movies images and 3 D objects that make up the content that the server uses Mac OS X Windows OS Y 4 AI Fixtures All Servers 4 servers All Configuration B L tent v B Susan 2 Sor VOI e User Objects These files folders and their DMX v Content 3 3 Stock Content values are collectively known as the gt User Content Stock Objects Content on the fixture gr User Objects B one 1 gt Stock Content three 3 The Client Management Window L7 Stock Objects E 3 brian 5 organizes and identifies content by Configuration 19 All Configuration source preloaded Stock content or custom User content and type Media files or 3D Object files NOTE Tree structure differs slightly on the two platform versions In the Mac Finder Media files are User Content and Stock Content options and a configuration option appears under the server In Windows Explorer configuration information for the server is located directly by selecting the server Preloaded Stock Content A large library of Stock Media and Stock Objects ships with every DL 2 fixture and will also be provided through upgrades from High End Systems This content is read only You won t be able to download edit the DMX values or remove these files from the fixture Custom User Content You can create your own custom User Media and User Objects content and upload it to fixtures The Stock Content and User Content reside in separate fo
66. the object begins rotating continuously Additional adjustment to the DMX values increases the speed of continuous rotation Counter clockwise Clockwise Indexed Rotation o Indexed Rotation 720 0 i 0 720 I A I l l Y 0 25 50 75 100 PR BE au Rotation Speed Rotation Speed 52 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Rotation Parameters X Rotation The X Rotation parameter rotates the selected Graphic Object around the x axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a vertical flip at variable speeds This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 94 Default DMX Value 32768 50 No X Rotation of Value Function Range 1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around X axis fast to slow 25 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around X axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around X axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around X axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around X axis slow to fast Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object through ano
67. to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset Sinewave Circular w Y axis Wobbulation object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 65 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the y axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset Sinewave Circular w Z axis Wobbulation object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 66 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the z axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset 118 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11
68. value 31884 All Position DMX values 32768 50 e 6 Object 1 Z Position DMX value 32822 Object 1 Z Position DMX value 33144 e x DL 2 User Manual 61 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale 62 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and ffects You can adjust opacity and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric effects to each individual Graphic Object The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you define Parameters for composite image intensity and effects are described in Chapter 10 Global Functions on page 81 Note The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output Opacity Adjusting an object s opacity allows one object to show through another You can adjust the opacity of an individual 3 D object from completely transparent to full opacity using this parameter Increase opacity from not visible at a value of zero to full opacity at a value of 255 Default DMX Value 0 completely transparent The Global Intensity parameter provides a similar adjustment to the combined image This global control parameter controls intensity levels on the overall image see Global Intensity on page 81 When you have multiple objects in relation to each other the Global Intensity parameter is the best
69. x andar il iad Channel DMX_Control Screen E TEES Use the Control Tab to configure your fixture Fixture ID You can choose from three DMX Protocol Led 1 types E Standard protocol requires 170 channels and enables all DL 2 parameters for direct 3 8 DMX p E Source Universe Subnet control E Art N 1 J 1 2 x ii E Dual protocol reduces the fixture footprint _ 2 rt Net to 132 channels by implementing only two 2 Protocol Start graphic objects EE Standard Single protocol simplifies DL 2 control toa amp z Channel single graphic object and uses 94 channels FI Fixture ID DMX Source defines the source of DMX data E and has two options ls 1 DMX512 Data is transmitted over standard DMX cables Art Net Data is transmitted over Ethernet cables using the Art Net protocol Set the number of DMX Universes and DL 2 Ethernet Subnetworks containing this fixture from 0 16 Scroll through the numbers 1 512 in the Start Channel field to set a valid start channel for the protocol you have chosen Standard protocol 1 343 Dual Protocol 1 381 Single Protocol 1 419 For more on choosing valid DL 2 start channels see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 35 You can assign each fixture a unique Fixture I D number from 1 255 This allows the fixture to be identified on the DL 2 ethernet fixture link for tasks like synchronizing playback between DL 2 fixtures and uploading custom
70. 2 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Z axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z 16384 26 49 84 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around Z axis 32768 50 32768 50 a5 circular 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Z axis in 32769 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Z axis slow to fast 65535 Graphic 1 Scaling Minimum object size along X axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along X axis from minimum 4 457 4 4g to actual size 86 Scale X Actual size along X axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along X axis from actual to 459 954 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along X axis 10 1 255 100 Minimum object size along Y axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 4 457 4 49 to actual size 87 Scale Y Actual size along Y axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along Y axis from actual to 459 254 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along Y axis 10 1 255 100 Minimum object size along Z axis 1 10 0 0 Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 4 457 4 49 to actual size 88 Scale Z Actual size along Z axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along Z axis from actual to 459 054 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along Z axis 10 1 255 100 202 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DM
71. 2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values 3 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 4 RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels 6 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR 8 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value DMX value invert color 9 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Effect ene gt 10 152 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue NA 0 0 M 2 ae Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 11 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 1e DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 15 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 16 RGB Invert Modi red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green t
72. 2 Object 1 X Position DMX value 32022 All Position DMX values 32768 50 d Object 1 X Position DMX value 33561 DL 2 User Manual 59 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Y Position The Y Position parameter moves your object along the y axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the image on the Y axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object down and values above the DMX midpoint move the object up Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame A Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 Y Position DMX value 32255 All Position DMX values 32768 50 d Object 1 Y Position DMX value 33269 60 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Z Position The Z Position parameter moves your object along the z axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the object on the z axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object away from the viewer and appears to become smaller and object above the DMX midpoint move the object toward the viewer and appears to become larger Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Tip This parameter can create a zoom effect Remember that by moving an object you can obscure other objects or move it behind your viewpoint where it is no longer visible AA Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 Z Position DMX
73. 23 24 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 25 Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 26 Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 27 Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 28 Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 29 Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 30 Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 31 Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved 32 Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode 33 Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist 34 Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size 35 Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size 36 Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod lens size 37 NA DL 2 User Manual 199 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity 38 Colo
74. 256 The second channel provides fine control and changes of the DMX value in increments of 1 Lighting Consoles Lighting consoles differ in many aspects and it is important to understand how your console operates with DL 2 fixtures Fixture Libraries Many sophisticated lighting consoles utilize pre made fixture libraries A fixture library consists of profiles for various types of lighting fixtures and devices Each profile corresponds to the fixture s DMX protocol and allows for ease of programming Depending upon the manufacturer of your lighting console some DL 2 parameters might have different labels for parameter names and functions than are listed within this manual Consult your lighting console manual for further information Using DL 2 Servers with a WholeHog Console Adding a Fixture The DL 2 fixture consists of three different fixture types in the Wholehog 3 library systems This allows for ease of programming as well as the ability to adjust quickly for any of the various DMX protocol options There are three basic fixtures used to control a single DL 2 unit The Motion fixture type controls the actual moving yoke projector and integrated camera The Global fixture type controls the global graphic engine functions such as intensity keystone correction viewpoint etc The Graphic fixture type controls each graphic object functions such as Opacity object media etc The DL 2 protocol allows for 1 2 or 3 graph
75. 2v 4 6 080 KB 10 5 2004 3 00 00 PM Seren Menten 9 5 Mes ana 3D Object Files Object files are the 3 D object component files used to build a graphic image DL 2 protocol supports a combined total of 255 object files displayed in Stock Objects and User Objects folders As with Stock Media files the Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be edited A User created object file must be assigned a unique DMX value between 150 255 Vieuiing Server Configuration Data Selecting an individual server from the list in the left pane displays all the configuration values for that server in the right pane Selecting All Configuration displays the combined configuration values for all the servers on the network For more information on fixture configuration see Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration on page 151 Mac OS X Viewing Server Configuration To access Server Configuration information for an individual server select the Configuration option under the individual server Viewing Content When viewing Content the right pane contains the following information in a table format HighEnd DL2 Management Client File Media Files Help HIGH END SYSTEMS All Servers 4 servers 2 two 2 E 000 Amorphous Long Trailer mv2 m m2v 1 38 929KB 2 2 2005 7 5 User Content E 001 Blue 70s mv2 m2v m2v 2 13 033KB 2 2 2005 8 01 Amorphous_Digi_gobos 40 E 002 Bright Psych mv2 m2v m2v 3 28316KB 2 2 2005 8 0 a Apoll
76. 3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Moa3 sets overall color range Effect Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on 152 Mode 2 Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 48 NA 0 0 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 63 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 64 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation 66 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation 67 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation 68 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 224 DL 2 User Manual Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset oa Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation 70 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation 71
77. 31 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32 image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area 33 Mod3 transparency mode Pixel twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist 34 center at 128 Picture in picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture 35 size Magnifying lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y 36 lens center Mod3 lens size NA APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol DL 2 User Manual 181 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Magnifying lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size 37 Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast 38 Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 39 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mod3 not used 40 RGB Swap to BGR 41 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme sele
78. 41 41 NA 0 0 User Folders 42 239 42 239 Reserved 240 254 Integrated video camera capture The Media File 255 parameter is ignored No selection 0 0 136 Media File First Media File 1 NA 0 0 Additional Media Files 2 255 2 255 eee ee le om E OutErame pea ae ah a Segment as ggas 0 100 65535 100 Play forward looping continuously 0 0 Play forward once and hold on the last frame 1 Pause 2 Play forward if opacity gt 0 hold on last frame 3 Play forward if opacity gt 0 looping continuously 4 Pause and rewind to In Frame 5 141 Play Mode Scrub Display the selected In Frame 6 NA 0 0 Scrub Display the selected Out Frame 7 Scrub Display the selected In Frame with 8 statistics Scrub Display the selected Out Frame with 9 statistics Reserved 10 255 216 DL 2 User Manual 142 143 144 145 Play Speed Sync Mode Sync To Visual Mode APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Normal Speed 0 0 Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 1 127 1 49 ma lo Normal Speed 128 50 Faster than Normal to Fastest 129 255 51 100 Graphic 3 Synchronization No selection 0 0 Synch to Graphic 1 movie time 1 Synch to Graphic 2 movie time 2 Synch to Graphic 3 movie time 3 Synch to Object rotation 1 4 Synch to Object rotation 2 5 Synch to Object rotation 3 6 Synch to reverse Object rotation 1 7 Synch to reverse Object rotation 2 8 NA 0 0 Synch to reverse Object rotat
79. 49 Camera Reset 150 155 DL 2 User Manual 177 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Home Pan Tilt 20 160 168 Reserved 169 NA Home Focus Zoom lIris 20 170 178 Reserved 179 Projector Menu 180 184 Projector Up arrow 185 188 Projector Down arrow 189 192 Projector Left arrow 193 196 Projector Right arrow 197 200 NA Store menu selection 201 204 Control Projector Floor Orientation 205 208 10 Function T 0O 0 continued Projector Ceiling Orientation Active 209 212 Projector Front Projection Commands 213 216 Projector Rear Projection 217 220 External RGBHV to Projector 221 224 NA Graphics Engine to Projector default 225 228 S Video In to Graphic Engine Internal Camera to 229 232 Camera Out NA Internal Camera to Graphics Engine default 233 236 Reserved 237 255 93 100 Internal Camera Functions 11 z 0 12 Camera Zoom Zoom position 65535 0 100 32768 50 Focus position 0 511 13 Camera 14 Focus Manual Focus from In Far End to Out Near 512 0 100 0 End 65535 Camera s IR sensing off illuminator off 0 63 0 24 15 Infrared Camera s IR sensing on illuminator off 64 127 25 49 0 0 Illuminator Camera s IR sensing on illuminator scaled f across the range from FULL to OFF 128 239907109 178 DL 2 User Manual 16 17 18 19 20 21 Camera Shutter White Balance Mode Camera Orientat
80. 5 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation RGB Invert Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 17 This option inverts color values to transition the image from an RGB to a CMY color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan ata value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow at a value of 255 100 106 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Invert and Suiap to BRG Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 19 This option swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted BRG color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of O to yellow at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of O to cyan at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta at a value of 255 100 RGB Invert and Swap to GBR M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 18 This option swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted GBR color model Modifier 1 Transition
81. 5 No Selection 0 Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 1 Sync to Fixture ID Number 2 2 NA 0 0 Sync to Fixture Number 254 254 Sync to Fixture ID Number 255 255 Graphic 2 Effects Off No visual mode processing applied to output 0 Content Optimization 1 Mod1 black level Mod2 contrast Sepia tones Mod1 fades from original color to 2 sepia colors Mod2 controls saturation Red tones Modi fades from original color to red 3 NA 1 1 tones Mod2 controls saturation Gray maker Mod1 compresses colors to shades 4 of gray Mod2 adjusts contrast Gray maker2 Always gray Mod1 brightness 5 Mod2 contrast DL 2 User Manual 205 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 adjusts contrast Color to Black amp White Mod1 fades color RGB 0 to B W 50 to white 100 Mod2 not 7 used Fire Gradient Mod1fades original to converted 8 Mod2 not used reserved Negative Art Mod1 fades from original image to 107 Visual Mode Converted image Mod subtracts red from 0 128 9 NA 1 1 subtracts green from 129 255 Exposure Control Mod1 adjusts color contrast 10 Mod2 adjusts color shift Invert B amp W Keep Color Mod1 black 11 comparison level Mod2 white comparison level Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 e 12 Crossfade from original to source texture Reserved defaults to Off 13 255 108 visual Mo
82. 7 CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintaining the Filtering System Like all high quality video projection units the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke DL 2 fixtures incorporate multiple air filters to reduce these risks to a minimum however the user must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check Do not situate DL 2 in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer Minimize the exposure of DL 2 to both glycol fog and mineral oil Filter Warnings The DL 2 menu system displays a series of filter status and warnings to alert you when a filter needs to be cleaned or replaced These appear in a large format that can be viewed from a distance The Info Status menu screen will include a detailed message concerning the large format Error Warning filter message The following messages will give you information regarding the status of the DL 2 filter system Filter Missing Error A filter not present or is not installed properly Check and insert missing filter Filter Service Warning The filter system is not operating optimally and needs to be serviced soon Filter Service Error The fil
83. 78 039 US 5 186 536 US 5 209 560 US 5 278 742 US 5 282 121 US5 307 295 US 5 329 431 US 5 331 822 US 5 367 444 US 5 402 326 US 5 430 629 US 5 432 691 US 5 454 477 US 5 455 748 US 5 506 762 US 5 515 254 US 5 537 303 US5 545 951 US 5 580 164 US 5 590 954 US 5 590 955 US 5 640 061 US 5 647 662 US5 665 305 US 5 691 886 US 5 728 994 US 5 758 955 US 5 758 956 US 5 769 527 US5 774 273 US 5 798 619 US 5 806 951 US 5 823 661 US 5 825 548 US5 828 485 US 5 829 868 US 5 857 768 US 5 882 107 US 5 934 794 US 5 940 204 US 5 945 786 US5 953 152 US 5 980 066 US 6 048 080 US 6 327 103 US 6 048 081 US 6 057 958 US6 054 816 US 6 126 288 US 6 142 652 US 6 172 822 US 6 188 933 US 6 208 087 US 6 219 093 US 6 220 730 US 6 241 366 US 6 255 787 US 6 256 136 US 6 278 542 US6 288 828 US 6 327 103 US 6 421 165 US 6 430 934 US 6 466 357 US 6 502 961 USD347 113 US D350 408 US D359 574 US D360 404 US D365 165 US D366 712 US D370 080 US D372 550 US D377 338 US D381 740 US D409 771 US 6693392 US 6719433 EP 0662275 EP 0767398 DE 621495 DE 655144 DE 797503 EP 0475082 GB 2 043 769 B GB 2 055 842 B GB 2 283 808 B GB 2 290 134 B GB 2 291 814 B GB 2 292 530 B GB 2 292 896 B GB 2 294 909 B GB 2 295 058 B GB 2 303 203 B GB 2 306 887 B GB 2 307 036 B GB 2 316 477 B MR0862 1996 M9 604 224 9 vi DL 2 User Manual What You Should Know About Copyright The following FAQ can help you understand copyright
84. Appendice Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza Avvertenza Per Prevenire Incendi 1 Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezione da sovraccarico massima di 20 ampere Avvertenza Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche 1 Da non montare sopra una superficie infiammabile 2 Mantenere l apparecchio a un minimo di 1 0 metri 3 28 piedi di distanza dai materiali combustibili Sostituire i fusibili usando soltanto quelli del tipo e della taratura adatta Mantenere una distanza minima di 1 0 metri 3 28 piedi dagli oggetti accesi Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezione da sovraccarico massima di 20 ampere Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock VIGTIGT LEDEREN MED GUL GROEN ISOLATION MAA KUN TILSLUTTES KLEMME MAERKET ELLER L DL 2 User Manual 241 APPENDIX E Safety Information 242 DL 2 User Manual
85. B add all pixels Red Green Blue 5 RGB add 2 all pixels Red Green Blue 6 RGB add to all non black pixels Red Green Blue 7 RGB swap to GBR Red to Green Green to Blue Blue to Red 8 RGB swap to BRG Red to Blue Green to Red Blue to Green 9 Solarize 1 If color value DMX value invert Red Green Blue color 10 Solarize 2 If color value gt DMX invert color Red Green Blue 11 Solarize 3 If color value lt DMX set color to 0 Red Green Blue 12 Solarize 4 If color value gt DMX set color to 0 Red Green Blue 13 DotP and resample Red Green Blue 14 Color cycle DMX value controls cycle speed Red Green Blue 74 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects DMX Effect Mode Adjustments Value Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier2 Modifier 3 15 All or Nothing If color value gt mod value Red Green Blue color 255 else color 0 16 RGB Solid color Red Green Blue Green to Blue to 17 RGB Invert Red to Cyan Magenta Yellow 18 RGB Invert and Swap to GBR Bedita aree io Blue to Magenta Yellow Cyan 19 RGB Invert and Swap to BRG Redio Green to Cyan Blue to Yellow Magenta 20 Edge Detect Color Horizontal Vertical Comparison search size search size threshold 21 Edge Detect B W Horizontal Vertical Comparison search size search size threshold 22 Texture Ripple Horizontal Amplitude Frequency Phase 23 Texture Ripple Vertical Ampl
86. By default the In Frame is the beginning of the media file and the Out Frame is the end of the file Media files can have different lengths In Frame and Out Frame Parameters You can select any segment of a media file for playback by assigning an In Frame value as a start point and an Out Frame as an end point Note DMX parameter values for these parameters do not correspond to a particular frame They are defined as a percentage of the movie length This makes it possible to create segments with an Out Frame preceding the In Frame and simplifies playback synchronization between media files The In Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX value equal to a starting point for the playback segment of the selected file The Out Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX value equal to an end point for the playback segment of the selected media file Assigning the In Frame and Out Frame parameters to default DMX values will playback the entire movie file Choosing other settings are useful when you want to begin or end a media file at any point other than the default start or stop on a specific image you need to shorten the media file to a specific length DL 2 User Manual 47 CHAPTER 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content In Frame Default DMX Value 0 The beginning of a media file is the playback start point Out Frame Default DMX Value 65535 The end of a media file is the playback endpoint As you move from 0 to
87. CAM_K NTSC_MJ PAL_D PAL_I SECAM_D SECAM_K1 PAL_G PAL_M SECAM_G SECAM_L PAL_N SECAM_H SECAM_L1 You will need to configure the DL 2 fixture to identify which video input source you have chosen The active input can be configured the following ways e Manually using the DL 2 menu system see information about the Projector Input field on the Set_Projector Screen on page 29 e Remotely through the CMA see Editing Configuration Values on page 152 Via the DMX console commands see Projector Control on page 129 NOTE The integrated cameras provides an NTSC M video signal 132 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 13 Live Video Input and Control Sending the Camera Feed to Camera Out The factory default assigns the video feed from the internal camera to the graphics engine However the DL2 fixture can be configured to route the camera video feed to the Camera Out connector by setting the Control Parameter to a DMX value between 229 232 NOTE The internal camera video feed can be routed to either the graphic engine or the camera out connector it can not be applied to both at the same time This setting will be retained until you change it or restore the factory defaults For more information on configuring and previewing the internal camera feed see Integrating Live Video and other Media with DL 2 at http www highend com products digital lighting dl 2 asp Controlling the Internal Camera Input Several parameters
88. DB aree ev A T RE REY Te ee e ad ania RETE EY 109 RGB Swap to RBG eerte Nei iau MOM ets EO ONU E a EM de Ue ponen 109 SCAN EINE da A a dd nadas 109 Solariz Ll ETE 110 Sola IZ 2 T 110 logro EUER 110 SOlALIZO 4 EEUU 111 Solid Color RGB tii aa be ee ele eei eee ree ad dde RO PEE TEC EU URP ERA YA Y 111 Geometric Effect Options eseeseseeseesesseees eene hannah anna nnn nnn 112 Cartoon Edge Ai e 112 Collage Generator ze te Fete ve e sen Duka qe dede e ERN ries re tes 112 Central Panorama Collage sssssssssssssese eee emnes enne 112 Horizontal Panorama Collage c cece teeter eem eene 113 Vertical Panoramas Collage 0ooocccoccccccccncconncconnnnnnncnnnnco nana nn hehehe hene 113 Curved Surface Support mirra HE eese E connate ER AAA MA ESTEE oa 114 Edge Detect Black and White cssssssssssssssssse meme mese 115 Edge Detect Color asec ete eee t aimo deca aceite ee E enact 115 Horizontal MIEFOF iere trt eet eere n one reve NE EH E e a ER ER RE ES 116 Magnifying LAS o oe Recte iio hanes Me AA ochos d QN 116 Magnifying Eeris 2 ener a een ee C Ptr ute detras e pe e tone d ded 116 DA MEE 117 RAIN CROP set obec ate EET 117 Sinewave Circular w X axis Wobbulation cceceee cece eee eee ee m 118 Sinewave Circular w Z axis Wobbulation cssssesss mm 118 Sinewave Horizontal w X axis Wobbulation sss 119 Sinewave Horizontal w Z axis W
89. DL 2 Digital Light User Manual High End Systems Inc 2005 All Rights Reserved Information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice High End Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual Trademarks used in this text High End Systems WholeHog III Catalyst the Catalyst Logo and LithoPatterns are registered trademarks and Hog iPC the High End Systems globe logo and the Hog logo are trademarks of High End Systems Inc or High End Systems Europe Ltd Belden is a registered trademark of Belden Inc Microsoft DirectX and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Super HAD and Sony are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sony Corporation in the United States and or other countries Art Net is a registered trademark of Artistic License Corporation Lightwave 3 D is a registered trademark of Newtek Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and in other countries Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products High End Systems disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names owned by others HIGH ND SYSTEMS q DL 2 User Manual P N 60600245 Software Release Version 1 2 3 July 2006 Contacting High End Systems
90. Dual Single Protocol Global Selects intensity level for the composite image Intensity Global Effects Off no effects selection 0 0 CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB Reduces color values Mod1 cyan 1 Mod2 2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY adds to all pixels Increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow 2 CMY adds to non black pixels Increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green 4 Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green 5 Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red 6 Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR Mod1 red Mod2 green 7 Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BRG Mod1 red 8 Mod2 green Mod3 blue Global 23 Effect 1 Solarize 1 If color value lt DMX value invert 0 0 color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 If color value gt DMX invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 19 Solarize 3 If color value lt DMX set color to 0 11 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 If color value gt DMX set color to 0 12 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 gt blue DotP and Resample Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 13 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod blue All or nothing Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue If color value gt mod value 15 color 255 else color 0 Solid color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 g
91. HIUSIS Fads Saturation Fades from original image color to Adjusts 3 Push to Red redtones Adjusts Fade Saturation 4 Graymak r Gradually transitions image from Replaces color Adjusts brightness y color to grayscale with gray of grayscale image Adjusts grayscale Adjusts grayscale 5 Graymaker2 Converts image to grayscale image black level image contrast Converts colors to their highest Reduces color 6 Posterizer Values without bleeding or blending detail Adjusts Contrast Fades the color through B W to Not Used grays White at 100 7 Color to B W Fades colors to black white with no Fades original image to red Not Used yellow gradient Maps original color intensity levels to B eire Gradient a red to yellow gradient Subtract red to 9 Negative Art Reverses image color Scales color Subtract Green 64 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Exposure eee Expand Contrast Adjusts 10 Control Alternate content optimization option Color color shift 11 Invert B W Inverts Black and White components Sets Black Sets White Color remains unaffected Comparision Level Comparison Level Crossfades between the texture of 12 Need another Graphic Object and the pera S Pri 9 texture for the current Graphic Object J Content Optimization Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 1 Stock content provided by High End Systems on your DL
92. Internal Projector s Menu To use the native projector menu system under DMX control 1 Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to zero 2 Set the Control parameter DMX value to 182 This will access the projector s main menu 3 Next change the DMX value of the Control panel to zero This command is equivalent to releasing the key on the projector s keypad Failure to release the key will result in unpredictable performance Optional If the projector is mounted on the ceiling flip the display by selecting a Control parameter DMX value from 209 212 4 Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to 255 100 to view the projector menu s on screen display 5 Adjust the Zoom and Focus parameters to bring the display into focus Now the control parameter s Projector Floor Orientation Projector Ceiling Orientation Projector Front Projection and Projector Rear Projection commands map to the Projector s menu control buttons 6 Use the projector s on screen display as discussed in the projector s user manual that shipped with your DL 2 fixture 130 DL 2 User Manual Chapter I3 Live Video Input and Control The DL 2 graphics engine can receive video from an external source or its own integrated digital video camera equipped with an infared illuminator to provide a direct digital video feed option Live Video Sources Internal Camera Every DL 2 is equipped with a internal 3 y e projector infrare video camera and IR illum
93. MS and double click on the line with Start Channel in the Name column to bring up the edit dialog box Enter a new configuration value ja 2 Enter a valid Start Channel for the protocol type you have chosen Standard protocol 1 343 Dual Protocol 1 381 Cancel Single Protocol 1 419 Shutting Down the Fixture Recommended Shutdown Options There are two recommended ways to shutdown the fixture 1 A DMX controller can shut down the fixture s motion controls and projector remotely with the shutdown option of the control channel see Fixture Operations on page 128 2 The DL 2 fixture automatically shuts down in the event of DMX data loss The default time is 10 min To edit the length of time the fixture waits for a DMX input before shutting down use the CMA see Editing Configuration Values on page 152 or the fixture s menu system see Set_Fixture Screen on page 28 WARNING Removing power directly without the shutdown sequence built into the two recommended procedures can severely reduce fixture reliability Placing Fixture in Road Case Before shipping the DL 2 fixture lock its pan and tilt position so the fixture does not move during transit To lock the fixture 1 Orient the projector head pan position as shown for packing in the road case and secure Lock with the pan lock located on the yoke base Note This is the only pan position that locks 2 Move the tilt loc
94. Menu display completely off instead of dimming it to video black L Display LED If you turn the LCD off and then remove power to the Menu Display Adjustment Buttons DL 2 the LCD power will restore the default ON when you reapply power to the fixture Note The LCD screen power button doesn t affect power to the fixture or the internal projector LCD Display Menu Options and Selection The button furthest from the green LED is the menu button Pressing this brings up the different functions contained in the LCD screen itself The screen menu options are Picture adjusts the sharpness of the screen Color adjusts the richness of the color Contrast adjustment Black Level adjustment Tint adjustment Restore returns the screen to the factory defaults The other two buttons are used to adjust the currently selected function Note Display Black Level can also be controlled by the DL 2 menu system see Set Tab on page 28 or remotely through the configuration options in the CMA see Editing Configuration Values on page 152 20 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Navigating the Menu Select any tab by pressing the corresponding button to the side of the display The tab label will be bold when selected Use the left and right arrow keys on the navigation buttons to move toa different screen Press the Tab Select button corresponding to the screen you want and press the lt Enter gt button to sel
95. Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation 70 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation 72 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 73 Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 Blue cycle 74 speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 255 411 Effect Mode 1 Agjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no 9 255 0 Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum Effect Mode 1 adjustment at 255 100 The type of adjust 112 Modifier 2 ment depends on the effect 0 255 0 Effect Mode 1 Note for some effects one or more modifiers 113 Modifier 3 may not be used 0 255 0 DL 2 User Manual 209 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Off no effects selection CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values 3 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 4 RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels 6 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue
96. Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset isos Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation z NA ojo oce Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 73 Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 Blue cycle 74 speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 255 Effect Mode 2 Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no ana 1 1 153 Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum 0 235 ed s n Effect Mode 2 adjustment at 255 100 The type of 194 Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect 0 255 1 100 0 0 Effect Mode 2 Note for some effects one or more modifiers 155 Modifier 3 may not be used 0 255 1 100 0 0 Graphic 3 Rotation Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around X axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 X axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around X 16384 56 4g 156 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around X axis 32768 50 32768 50 vertical flip 157 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769 51 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around X axis slow to fast 65535 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around Y axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Y axis Rotates the object counterclo
97. O Thee 10 10 10 10 15 10 10 10 105 O Two 10 10 10 106 7 Click Next to continue upgrade The DL 2 will reboot after the upgrading the software 8 Mac OS X Upgrading Software To upgrade multiple servers select multiple fixtures from the All Servers list Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration The CMA lets you remotely view and modify fixture settings Some settings like Lamp Hours CPU Temperature Software Versions etc are view only Other settings such as Fixture ID various Projector settings DMX Start Channel etc can be modified configured All of these settings are available for each fixture through the fixture menu system see Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System on page 19 The CMA has some additional configuration features that let you Assign a name to servers connected over the network for easier identification of servers on your network Compare all the Configuration Items of a certain type for a group of fixtures For example viewing the CPU Temperature for all the fixtures on a network DL 2 User Manual 151 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Viewing Fixture Configuration Values To view configuration information for a individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane fef Hightnd DL2
98. Speed Off require the Dimmer be closed DMX Value 0 DMX Value Control Option Description Range 10 13 Disables Pan and Tilt MSpeed 20 28 Disables the LCD Display 30 38 Dims the LCD display 40 48 Enables the LCD display 50 58 Enables Preview Mode for the LCD display 60 68 Homes all the fixture mechanical functions 80 88 Manually turns the Lamp ON 90 98 Manually turns the Lamp OFF 120 130 Shuts down the fixture 145 149 Resets the Graphics Engine 150 155 Resets the Camera functions 160 168 Homes only the Pan and Tilt functions 170 178 Homes only the Focus Zoom and Dimmer components 128 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 12 Fixture Motion Functions Projector Control Control Parameter Projector Options These Control parameter options remotely access and operate the internal projector s menu system DMX Value Control Option Description Range 180 184 Displays the Projector s internal Menu System 185 188 Projector Up arrow 189 192 Pr je tor Down arrow These options control the directional buttons on the projector 193 196 Projector Left arrow menu display and cannot be activated until you set the Dimmer parameter to 0 197 200 Projector Right arrow 201 204 Store Menu selection 205 208 Projector Floor Orientation These commands activate the projector s setting for specific mounting or projection alternatives Once set these commands main
99. Systems and DL 2 logos 24 HES Hi Res Variety of high resolution video backgrounds 25 NASA Images Space images from the Hubble telescope 26 Blue Pony Assorted video loops 27 Diagnostics Setup and Test images 28 39 Reserved Reserved for HES use 40 240 Open Available for User Content 255 Video Input Live video input from internal camera or external device 46 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content Media File The Media File parameter lets you identify which Stock or User media file to apply map as a texture on the selected 3 D object You can supplement the large library of Stock video loops and still images with Custom files This parameter selects media files from within the folder defined by the Media Folder parameter For a reference of media files available as stock content with your DL 2 fixture got to the link for the Stock Content Guide on http di2supportguide You can also view thumbnail images of media files in the CMA see Viewing Files on page 140 Default DMX Value 0 No file selected Tip You can preview a visual display of the media files loaded on a DL 2 fixture in the Content Management Application s thumbnails view see Viewing Content on page 139 or in the File Tab of a DL 2 fixture menu display see File Screen on page 30 Defining a Media File Segment You can define any portion of a video media file to play using the In Frame and Out Frame parameters
100. Universe 0 16 Box Current Temperature Read only Box Maximum Temperature Read only Box Minimum Temperature Read only Box Temperature Reset Pressing Reset restores value to Current Temperature CPU Current Temperature Read only CPU Maximum Temperature Read only CPU Minimum Temperature Read only CPU Temperature Reset Pressing Reset restores value to Current Temperature Data Loss Timeout Iris Closes iris when system stops receiving DMX data Long 5 minute delay Short 5 second delay Disk Free Space Read only Display Invert On manually inverts display Off reverts to default display orientation Auto automatically inverts display when fixture is turned more than 90 degrees vertically Display Level Off turns off display Touching any button turns it back on Dim lowers the brightness level Bright full brightness level Preview displays currently selected content DL 2 User Manual 153 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Configuration Item Configuration Value Options DMX Protocol Standard 170 channel footprint Dual 132 channels Single 94 channels DMX Source DMX512 or Art Net Enable Focus Override On selects manual focus Off resets to DMX control Enable Zoom Override On selects manual zoom Off resets to DMX control Fixture Defaults On restores fixture defaults Off displays whenever defaults has bee
101. Value 1 full screen flat surface TIP You can select the same object file for images that will be interacting with each other If both objects occupy exactly the same area in 3 D space Z fighting a shimmering effect on some portions of the composite image can occur as the graphics engine tries to determine which object should be in the foreground You can avoid this effect by making a slight adjustment to one of the object s scale or moving it forward or back using the Z Position parameter in respect to the other 44 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content Media Folder This parameter defines a folder directory containing a collection of media files The media files within the assigned folder can then be selected using the Media File parameter Media Folder DMX values are assigned as follows DMX values from 1 38 select from the stock Media collections that shipped with your DL 2 fixture A DMX value of 39 is reserved for a Setup and Test folder DMX Values 40 239 are reserved for assignment to Custom folders containing user Media collections A DMX value of 255 selects the live video feed from the integrated video camera capture or S Video input see Chapter 13 Live Video Input and Control on page 131 for more information Default DMX Value 1 HES Core Media files DL 2 User Manual 45 CHAPTER 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content Media Folder Descriptions
102. X set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 11 Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 12 DotP and Resample Mod1 Mod2 and Moa3 control resampling 13 Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 14 All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 15 Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 16 RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue 17 RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red 18 RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 19 20 Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 21 Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 22 Texture Ripple Vertical Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 23 Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 24 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 25 Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3
103. X Protocol Graphic 1 Position Moves object left from center of display 0 36767 0 49 89 ar X Position Centers object along X axis in display 32768 50 90 z 36769 Moves object right from center of display 65535 Moves object down from center of display 0 36767 0 49 91 X Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768 50 32768 50 92 36769 Moves object up from center of display 65535 51 100 Moves object nearer from center of display 0 36767 0 49 93 GET Z Position Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 50 32768 50 94 Moves object back along Z axis at center of 36769 51 100 display 65535 DL 2 User Manual 203 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Graphic 2 Functions Standard Dual MEA 0 00 25 Graphic 2 Content Definition No selection 0 0 First Stock 3 D Object flat plane 1 1 96 E Object Additional Stock 3 D Objects 2 149 11 First User 3 D Objects 150 NA Additional User Objects 151 255 No selection 0 HES Folder 1 1 HES folder 2 40 2 40 97 Media Folder First User folder 41 41 NA 0 0 User Folders 42 239 42 239 Reserved 240 254 Integrated video camera capture The Media File 255 parameter is ignored No selection 0 0 98 Media File First Media File 1 N 0 0 Additional Media Files 2 255 2 255 Oka AAA E Play forward looping continuously 0 0 Play forward once and hold o
104. a e Pin 5 Secondary data Terminator 5 pin male XLR connector with a 120 Ohm terminating resistor fitted between pins 2 and 3 DL 2 User Manual 235 APPENDIX D DL 2 Specifications 236 DL 2 User Manual Appendix Safety Information Warning For Continued Protection Against Fire 1 This equipment for connection to branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A Warning For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock 1 If this equipment was received without a line cord plug attach the appropriate line cord plug according to the following code brown live e blue neutral e green yellow earth 2 Asthe colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows e the core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow the core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black the core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red Class equipment This equipment must be earthed Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture Refer servicing to qualified personnel no user serviceable parts insi
105. alue displayed for the file or folder Valid DMX Values Certain DMX values are Reserved for special purposes and are not user assignable You can change the assigned DMX value for a User Content item to another valid DMX value A valid DMX value is From 0 255 e Is not one of the reserved values for that type of content e Is unique from other content of it s type except for zero The following table shows valid and reserved values for User Content Content Type DMX Values Description Reserved 0 No Selection 1 40 Default Stock media 41 239 User collections 240 254 Reserved 255 Internal Camera video feed 0 No Selection 1 255 Media files 0 No selection Objects 1 149 Stock 3D Objects 150 255 User 3D Objects Media Folders media file collections Media Files 142 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Moving User Content Files and Folders User content can be easily moved between fixtures and your local drive as well as between fixtures Which method you use depends on How much content you want to move What existing server content you want to preserve Whether the client machine is currently connected to the ethernet fixture link f you want to maintain currently assigned content identification DMX values Which CMA version you are using Windows or Mac OS There are several methods for moving User content files and media folders between DL 2
106. anual 73 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Effect Mode and Effect 2 Mode Two Effect Mode parameters are available for each individual 3 D object each with three Modifier parameters Both Effect parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect options This lets you apply a dual effect combination to the selected 3 D object Note wobbulating object very well Not all modes combine effectively For example you cannot glow a The table below describes the interaction between an Effect Mode parameter and its three associated Modifier parameters You can find a detailed description and example of each option in Chapter 11 Effect Mode Descriptions on page 93 Note Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog 3 system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog 3 functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Effect Mode 2 Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 DMX Effect Mode Adjustments Value Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier 2 Modifier 3 0 Safe no effects selection NA NA NA 1 CMY RGB inverse Cyan Magenta Yellow 2 CMY add to all pixels Cyan Magenta Yellow 3 CMY add to all non black pixels Cyan Magenta Yellow 4 RG
107. arent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode 33 Pixel twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist center at 128 34 Picture in picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size 35 Magnifying lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size 36 Magnifying lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size 37 Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity 38 Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left 39 Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mod3 not used 40 RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 41 RGB Swap to RBG Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 42 NA DL 2 User Manual 185 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol RGB Swap to GRB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 43 Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls ld transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls
108. arrowest bandwidth to 255 widest bandwidth Modifier 3 Turns selected intensity range transparent from 0 no change to 128 fully transparent DMX values above the midpoint of the range change all intensities outside of the selected range transparent from 129 no transparency to 255 full reverse transparency 104 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Mask Color Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 128 This option applies color to a selected mask shape Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Mask Color and dge Fade Color Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 130 This option applies a color to both the selected Mask shape and any selected Edge parameter Color can also be applied to Mask shape see Picture in Picture on page 117 and Edge parameter s separately Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustmen
109. b Display the selected In Frame with 8 statistics Scrub Display the selected Out Frame with 9 statistics Reserved 10 255 3 100 192 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Normal Speed 0 0 Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 1 127 1 49 66 Play Speed 128 50 Normal Speed 128 50 Faster than Normal to Fastest 129 255 51 100 Graphic 1 Synchronization No selection 0 0 Synch to Graphic 1 movie time 1 Synch to Graphic 2 movie time 2 Synch to Graphic 3 movie time 3 Synch to Object rotation 1 4 Synch to Object rotation 2 5 Synch to Object rotation 3 6 Synch to reverse Object rotation 1 7 67 Sync Mode Synch to reverse Object rotation 2 8 0 0 Synch to reverse Object rotation 3 9 bo Synch to Graphic movie time and rotation 1 10 Synch to Graphic movie time and rotation 2 11 Synche to Graphic movie time and rotation 3 12 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 1 13 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 14 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 3 15 Reserved Defaults to mode 0 no selection 16 255 No Selection 0 Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 1 68 Sync To Sync to Fixture ID Number 2 2 NA 0 0 Sync to Fixture Number 254 254 Sync to Fixture ID Number 255 255 Graphic 1 Effects Off No visual mode processing applied to output 0 Content Optimization 1 Mod1 black level Mod2 contrast Sepia tones Mod1 fades
110. bbulation 64 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65 Effect Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 148 M NA 0 0 ode 1 Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation m Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation 67 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation 68 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation 69 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation 70 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation 71 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation 72 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 73 Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 Blue cycle 74 speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 255 Effect Mode 1 Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no as 0 255 1 100 0 0 di Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum Effect Mode 1 adjustment at 255 100 The type of 150 Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect 0 255 1 100 0 0 Effect Mode 1 Note for some effects one or more modifiers 151 Modifier 3 may not be used 0 255 1 100 0 0 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Off no effects selection CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod
111. blue 26 Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 27 Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 28 Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 29 NA DL 2 User Manual 219 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color 31 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32 image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area 33 Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center 34 Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture 35 center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center 36 Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center 37 Effect Mod3 lens size 148 Mode 1 Cartoon Edge NA 0 0 Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast 38 Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 39 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and M
112. blue component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 full red and green opacity intensity DotP and Resample M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 13 This option applies an algorithm that pixelates and solarizes the image It also makes the surface of some 3D objects appear reflective Modifier 1 Adjusts algorithm Modifier 2 Adjusts algorithm Modifier 3 Adjusts algorithm Edge Fade Color Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 129 This option applies color to a selected Edge Fade parameter see Image Edge Fade on page 91 Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation DL 2 User Manual 103 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Glow Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 73 Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media texture on it You can apply this option to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it This parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without displaying the associated texture Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjust
113. bottom Tab Select buttons for more than two seconds opens the iris when the fixture software is not running to allow navigation for content upgrades and motion uploads To Exit this mode press the same button combination again for more than two seconds Press at the same time to open Iris 5 Press at the same time to Home aana smeis soyafoug O smog Ol pass Press at the same time to 4 2 le Fl LT E a stop homing Co S E RVI E OE E a HIGH END SYSTEMS TZ A CJ 0000 Large Format Error Warning Message Display Status Message Menu Display The DL 2 fixture menu displays error warning information in two ways The first is the large block format that can be viewed from a distance when the menu is idle When there is more than one message the large format display cycles through the messages Each message displays for 3 seconds before cycling to the next message and continues looping through these messages until they have been cleared internally or you interact with the menu DL 2 User Manual 165 CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Button Action When in the large format display pressing any button reverts to the normal menu display showing the Detailed Message Display pane in the Info_Status tab of the menu At that point you can view the detailed information for the error warning messages or navigate elsewhere Inactivity Timer After 30 seconds of inactivi
114. button on the screen to build the summary table Upgrading Software Upgrade Management allows the user to upgrade the DL 2 fixture applications Mac OS 10 4 or the XP Embedded operating system and fixture firmware on the system Verifying Software Versions Running the latest version of both the CMA Client software and the DL 2 Server software will ensure that you will get the best performance from the fixtures on your network To verify the CMA version select About from the Help drop down menu The DL 2 software version is displayed for each server on the network in the All Servers view DL 2 User Manual 149 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Note Although running different versions of software on servers is not prohibited it is highly recommended that all servers on the network be running the same software version HighEnd DL2 Management Client File Servers Help HIGH END SYSTEMS Ed brian 5 fy three 3 192 168 1 106 1 0 0 206 two 192 168 1 108 1 0 0 218 DL2 three 192 168 1 103 1 0 0 218 DL2 one 192 168 1 104 1 0 0 218 Axon All Configuration Upgrading the CMA Software Close the CMA before upgrading the CMA software To Upgrade software 1 Download the latest version of the application from the Support section of the High End Systems website www highend com A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal computer 2 A dialog box will give you the option to Run
115. cabling attached The driver board for pan functions and fans is located directly behind the display After detaching all cabling pull board out and replace CAUTION The fixture will not function correctly if contact screws are missing from driver boards Reattach cables 7 Replace the side panel and top cover Make sure you align the assembly properly when inserting damage to the fixture can result from improper alignment Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface Select Calibrate Motors through the Test_Home menu screen and leave the fixture undisturbed for 10 minutes while calibration occurs 164 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section discusses troubleshooting LED states and general troubleshooting suggestions Button Shortcut Commands DL 2 fixtures have button commands available for controlling and overriding functionality when you are troubleshooting your fixture Holding the Menu amp Enter buttons for more than two seconds disables motion system Motors are still energized so unit can be pointed for trouble shooting To Exit this mode press the Menu amp Enter buttons again for two seconds or send a Global Reset command Holding down the middle two menu Tab Select buttons for more than two seconds initiates a Global Reset of the motion hardware and homes the unit Holding down the second from the top and second from the
116. chen Schlag und Verletzung von Personen finden Sie in Anhang E Vor der Montage dem Zusammenbau und der Intbetriebnahme dieses Ger ts alle Anleitungen sorgfaltig durchlesen Informazioni I mportanti Di Sicurezza Le istruzioni sulla protezione da incendi folgorazione e infortuni sono contenute nell appendice E Si prega di leggere tutte le istruzioni prima di assemblare montare e azionare l apparecchiatura Informacion I mportante De Seguridad En el Ap ndice E se encuentran instrucciones sobre protecci n continua contra incendios descarga el ctrica y lesiones personales Lea por favor todas las instrucciones antes del ensamblaje montaje y operaci n de este equipo iv DL 2 User Manual Symbols The following international caution and warning symbols appear in margins throughout this manual to highlight messages CAUTI ON This symbol appears adjacent to Caution messages Not heeding these messages could result in personal injury and or damage to equipment WARNING This symbol appears adjacent to high voltage warning messages Not heeding these messages could result in serious personal injury This symbol indicates the minimum focus distance from a combustible object This symbol cautions against mounting the fixture on a flammable surface This symbol indicates that while operating equipment surfaces may reach very high temperatures Allow the fixture to cool before handling Re gt gt Fog Machine Warn
117. ciated Modifier parameters to adjust the effect The behavior of the Modifier parameters depends upon the selected effect For a general information on Graphics Control features see Graphics Engine Overview on page 39 For a table of graphic level Effects parameter options see Effect 1 and Effect 2 on page 76 For a table of global level Effects parameter options see Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 on page 82 Color Conversion Both Object and Global Effect parameters include options for swapping colors to provide quick color conversions Use the following DMX Values in any of the Effect parameters to make these color conversions DMX Value Conversion Effect 7 Red Green Green Blue Blue Red 8 Red Blue Green Red Blue Green 17 Red Cyan Green Magenta Blue Yellow 18 Red gt Magenta Green gt Yellow Blue gt Cyan 19 Red gt Yellow Green gt Cyan Blue gt Magenta 41 Red gt Blue Green gt Green Blue gt Red 42 Red gt Red Green gt Blue Blue gt Green 43 Red gt Green Green gt Red Blue gt Blue DL 2 User Manual 97 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effect Mode Color Options All or Nothing Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 15 This option reduces all color values to full saturation or no color based on comparison to a set threshold This effect creates an image with fully saturated color Modifier 1 Compares the red componen
118. ckwise around Y 16384 56 4g 158 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 O rotation around Y axis 32768 50 32768 50 horizontal flip 159 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769 51 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Y axis slow to fast 65535 DL 2 User Manual 225 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Z axis Ted Rotation 161 circular 16 bit adjustment Continuous variable speed counterclockwise Rotates the object clockwise around Z axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute Continuous rotation stop object rotation around Z axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z 16384 26 49 axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around Z axis 32768 50 49151 49152 Continuous variable speed clockwise object rotation around Z axis slow to fast Graphic 3 Scaling Minimum object size along X axis 1 10 49154 0 Increases object size along X axis from minimum 32768 50 i 1 127 1 49 to actual size 162 Scale X Actual size along X axis 1 1 128 50 128 50 Increases object size along X axis from actual to 456 054 51 99 maximum size Maximum object
119. content with the Content Management Application CMA You can manually set this number in the menu or through the CMA see Fixture Identification on page 136 For more on DL 2 Ethernet fixture links see Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link on page 11 DL 2 User Manual 25 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System DMX_Protocol Tab This tab displays the current DMX value being received from a console for each parameter after any conversion such as internal self test or protocol conversion The DMX parameters are grouped into general categories each with a separate tab For more information on individual parameters and their DMX value ranges see Appendix A DL 2 DMX Protocol on page 177 DMX_Protocol_Motion Screen The Motion tab displays parameters associated with fixture movement projector control and integrated camera functionality For more information on specific Motion and Camera parameters see Chapter 12 Fixture Motion Functions on page 127 Chapter 13 Live Video Input and Control on page 131 DMX Protocol Global Screen The Global tab display the current values for parameters that affect the composite image For more information on specific Global parameters see Chapter 10 Global Functions on page 81 DMX Protocol Obj Screens Obj 1 Obj 2 and Obj 3 tabs display parameters values affecting a single object s content For more information on specific Graphic Function parameters see Chapter 6 Graphic F
120. ct around the Z axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a circular spin at variable speeds Default DMX Value 32768 50 No Z Rotation of Value Range 4 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around Z axis fast to slow 25 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around Z axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around Z axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around Z axis in steps to 720 degrees 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around Z axis slow to fast This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 94 Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object around another Original Object 1 and Object 2 Z axis Rotation Applied to Object 2 DL 2 User Manual 55 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Scaling the Object You can scale an Graphic Object along the X Y and or Z axis to adjust the object size The Scale parameter adjusts the size of the object s image up to approximately 10x its original size At a DMX value of zero the image shrinks to a dot At the midpoint of the DMX value range the image is normal size When t
121. ction Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls 49 Global transparency l 23 Effect 1 Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 NA 0 0 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate RGB Scale Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Mod sets overall color range Reserved Defaults to effect 0 48 Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha 49 Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 127 Mask color Mod1 red Mod2 green 128 Mod3 blue Edge fade color Mod1 red Mod2 green 129 Mod3 blue Mask color and Edge fade color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 190 182 DL 2 User Manual 23 Global Effect 1 24 Global Effect 1 Moditier 1 Global Effect 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum 25 a Modifier 2 obal Effect 1 The type of adjustment depends on the particular GI Moditier 3 Background Color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Background Color Cycle Mod1 red speed Mod2 green speed Mod3 blue speed 132 Reserved Defaults to ef
122. d DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed Texture Ripple Circular M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 24 Varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the z axis without affecting the underlying object This creates an effect of concentric rippling out from the object center Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 10096 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed 122 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Ripple Horizontal Y Object Effect Y Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 22 Varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the x axis without affecting the underlying object Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 max
123. d your product excluding the lamp is covered by a one year parts and labor limited warranty The lamp warranty for Christie projectors is 120 days or 500 hours whatever comes first It is the owner s responsibility to furnish receipts or invoices for verification of purchase date and dealer or distributor If purchase date cannot be provided date of manufacture will be used to determine warranty period DL 2 User Manual v Returning an Item Under Warranty for Repair It is necessary to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from your dealer or point of purchase BEFORE any units are returned for repair The manufacturer will make the final determination as to whether or not the unit is covered by warranty Any Product unit or parts returned to High End Systems must be packaged in a suitable manner to ensure the protection of such Product unit or parts and such package shall be clearly and prominently marked to indicate that the package contains returned Product units or parts and with an RMA number Accompany all returned Product units or parts with a written explanation of the alleged problem or malfunction Ship returned Product units or parts to 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA Note Freight Damage Claims are invalid for fixtures shipped in non factory boxes and packing materials Freight All shipping will be paid by the purchaser Items under warranty shall have return shipping paid by the manufacturer only i
124. dded will appear in the right hand column of the wizard 3 D objects do not get added to folders 6 Click Next at the bottom of the wizard This will take you to another screen where you choose where to save and what to name your archive 7 Click Browse to navigate to where you want to save and name your archive 8 Click Next Your archive will then be created NOTES The Remove Media and Remove Object buttons can be used to remove media files and objects from the wizard when creating the archive Currently the archive will not be created unless each media folder created has at least one media file in it All media folders files and objects will be assigned DMX addresses in alphabetical fashion For CMA Running Mac OS 10 4 To create a Local Archive you must first create the folder structure recognized by the CMA The Creative Local Archive compresses these files into a dlc format that can be recognized for uploading Use the following folder structure in preparing files for a local Archive A top level folder which contains a Media and Objects folder The Media folder must contain subfolders and valid files may go into those subfolders Only objects with a x extension are allowed in the Objects folder no subfolders Creating Content Backup Archive Backups are created using the Content Archive feature An Content Archive file is a compressed file containing all the User Content from a single fixture along with the ass
125. de DL 2 User Manual 237 APPENDIX E Safety Information Appendice Importantes Informations Sur La S curit Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les I ncendies 1 Cet appareil de connection au circuit comporte une protection contre les surcharges de 20 A Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs Electriques 1 Si cet quipement est livr sans prise de cable veuillez connecter la prise de cable correcte selon le code suivant e marron phase e bleu neutre e vert jaune terre D brancher le courant avant de changer les lampes ou d effectuer des r parations Cet quipement doit tre uniquement utilis dans des endroits secs Ne pas l exposer la pluie ou l humidit 4 Al int rieur de l quipement il n y a pas de pi ces remplacables par l utilisateur Confiez l entretien un personnel qualifi 5 Equipement de Classe I Cet quipement doit tre mis la terre 238 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX E Safety Information Anhang Wichtige Hinweise F r Ihre Sicherheit Warnung Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr 1 Dieses Ger t darf nur an eine Zweigleitung mit einem berlastungsschutz von h chstens 20 A angeschlossen werden Warnung Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rperstr me 1 Wenn dieses Gerat ohne einen Netzkabelstecker erhalten wurde ist der entsprechende Netzkabelstecker entsprechend dem folgenden Code anzubringen e Braun Unter Spannu
126. de Adjusts selected Visual Mode from O to maximum 0 255 0 100 0 0 Modifier 1 109 MEUM Mode Adjusts selected Visual Mode from O to maximum 0 255 0 100 0 0 Modifier 2 Off no effects selection 0 0 0 0 CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values 2 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels 4 Effect Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue ec 110 RGB Add 2 All Pixels Mode 1 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 5 NA 0 0 RGB Add non black pixels 6 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR 8 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value DMX value invert color 9 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value DMX invert color 10 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 206 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 11 Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 12 DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Moa3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green
127. e Detect Color mae search size search size threshold Hori Vertical C i 21 Edge Detect B W orizontal er ica omparison search size search size threshold 22 Texture Ripple Horizontal Amplitude Frequency Phase 23 Texture Ripple Vertical Amplitude Frequency Phase Phase and i i Ampli F 24 Texture Ripple Circular mplitude requency Direction 25 Texture Ripple Circular Asymmetrical Amplitude Frequency Phase 26 Chromakey Fine select key color using Red Green Blue Modifier channels 27 Chromakey Medium select key color using Red Gleen Blue Modifier channels 28 Chromakey Coarse select key color using Red Green Blue Modifier channels 29 Chromakey Fine Inverse select key color Red Greeni Blue using Modifier channels 30 Chromakey Medium Inverse select key color Red Gree Blue using Modifier channels 31 Chromakey Coarse Inverse select key color Red Geen Blue using Modifier channels Fades to Scan Line converts image colors to colors in a Selects 32 s A f converted Not used single line of the image scan line image i 1 th Treinsparent pipes opone d E sa Selects center Selects from 6 33 graphic to reveal another graphic positioned Area of wipe of wipe wipe options Direction and 34 Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture X twist center Y twist center amount of twist 35 Picture in picture duplicates the texture and X subpicture X subpicture Subpicture overlays it on the orig
128. e Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list 4 Browse to the destination on your hard drive then select Paste from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list Mac OS X Downloading files You can drag single or multiple files and folders from a fixture to the Finder You cannot use the copy paste Apple C Apple V to move a single file or folder from a fixture to the Finder 8 Mac OS X File transfer SMB limitation is 4GB file size per transfer What this means is more than 4GB of data may be transferred but no file can be greater than 4GB in size Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a DL 2 Fixture You can upload User Content Media files Media folders and 3D object files from your hard drive to a DL 2 Server provided they are A valid file format jpg gif png bmp avi mpg m2v for Media Files x for 3D Object files You are uploading them to the appropriate User content folder on the DL 2 fixture server To upload content 1 Display the file or folder destination in the right pane of the CMA window 2 Browse to the file or folder you want to upload on your hard drive and click on it to select 3 Drag and drop it into the appropriate User content folder OR 4 Select Copy from the Edit drop down menu or the right click popup list 5 Select Paste from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup
129. e of adjustment depends on the effect 0 255 1 100 Note for some effects one or more modifiers may not be used 0 255 1 100 Graphic 1 Rotation Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around X axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Rotates the object counterclockwise around X 16384 26 49 axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around X axis 32768 50 Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769 51 74 steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around X axis slow to fast 65535 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around Y axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y 16384 26 49 axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around Y axis 32768 50 Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769 51 74 steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Y axis slow to fast 65535 32768 32768 50 50 DL 2 User Manual 201 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around Z axis fast to slow 1638
130. e parameters DMX values 128 50 Scaled 3 times in Y direction DL 2 User Manual 57 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Z Scale The Z Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the z axis either expanding or shrinking it Use it when you want to size the object s thickness A DMX value of 128 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the the object thickness until it reaches a point at a value of 0 Values greater then 50 enlarge the object to a maximum thickness at 255 100 Default DMX Value 128 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 Z Scale parameter DMX value 223 All Scale parameters DMX values 128 50 Scaled 7 5 times in Z direction 58 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Changing Object Position You can reposition each 3 D object s position in 3 D space by moving it along the X Y and Z axes The following parameters act on an individual object Use these parameters to position 3 D images in relation to each other X Position The X Position parameter moves your object along the x axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the image on the X axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object left and values above the DMX midpoint move the object right Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Original Object 1 and Object
131. e s color components cycle through RGB black and white When no Red Green or Blue is added image fades from full white to normal image to black When RGB CMY is added the image fades from the RGB value to the image with color added Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum blue saturation Color DeConverge Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 39 This effect option separates the different color components of an image and offsets them from the original image position Modifier 1 Moves the image s red component up from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum distance from original position Modifier 2 Moves the image s green component down and right from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Moves the image s blue component down and left from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum blue saturation Colorize Gray Scale Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 44 This option maps a selected pixel intensity to a selected color scheme A variety of color schemes simulate effects like thermography This is especially effective effect when applied to input from the internal camera
132. e the lamp cover and tighten the two lap cover screws 9 Reconnect to power Lamp assembly screws DL 2 User Manual 161 CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing the Fuse Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling WARNINGS AN Disconnect power before servicing z The DL 2 has one user serviceable fuse which controls mains voltage to the fixture To replace a fuse 1 Disconnect power to the fixture If the fixture has been operating allow the fixture to cool before handling 2 Loosen the 2 Phillips head screws on the top cover of the connector side of the box 3 Tilt the connector panel away from the box 4 Remove the fuse from the fuse holder 5 Replace the fuse with a 5A slow blow fuse only 6 Replace the side and top panels Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling WARNINGS Disconnect power before servicing To access the front Phillips screws Phillips head screws window and washers 1 Remove the four phillips head screws two on each side of the front bezel 2 Slide the bezel from the front of the fixture 162 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 3 Disconnect power to infrared il
133. each displaying their portion of the content The second set of numbers is the aspect ratio for the overall panorama configuration Image Resolution is represented as width and height in pixels The number of DL2 units required is also noted Central Panorama Collage Array Array W Aspect Maximum Recommended DL 2 Configuration x H Ratio Image Resolution W x H Units 2x2 4 3 1024 W x 768 H 4 3x3 4 3 1024 W x 768 H 9 4x4 43 1024 W x 768 H 16 112 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Horizontal Panorama Collage Array Array Aspect Maximum Recommended DL 2 Configuration W x H Ratio Image Resolution W x H Units 2x1 8 3 1440 W x 540 H 2 3x1 41 1760 W x 440 H 3 4x1 16 3 2016 W x 378 H 4 Vertical Panoramas Collage Array Array Aspect Maximum Recommended Image DL 2 Configuration WxH Ratio Resolution W x H Units 1x2 2 3 720 W x 1080 H 2 1x3 4 9 576 W x 1296 H 3 1x4 1 3 496 W x 1488 H 4 Modifier 1 Selects what type of collage array to use No Collage 2x4 1 2x1 13 4x3 2 1x2 14 3x4 3 2x2 15 4x4 4 3x1 16 255 Reserved defaults z 133 to no collage Modifier 2 Selects which portion of the grid a particular DL2 will display
134. ect Use the multidirection button to move left right up down to a field The currently selected field will be highlighted Press the lt Enter gt button to go into edit mode the DUO DUDOUU selected field and a list box will open to show all the options for that field x Tab Enter Use the Up Down keys to scroll through the items in ae the list highlighting the current item Pressing the Navigation lt Enter gt button again stores the selection and buttons closes the list To edit a field press the lt Enter gt button to pop open the drop down list where up down selects the item Pressing lt Enter gt again commits the change Pressing the lt Escape gt button instead of lt Enter gt leaves the original setting and closes the list To return to a high tab level press the left direction on the Navigation button DL 2 User Manual 21 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System DL 2 Menu Options The menu display consists of a set of top level tabbed screens and their associated subtabs Main Tab DMX Set eni Brass s Options Function Notes DMX512 Sets DMX as fixture communication source Source Art Net Set Universe field from 0 16 Art Net protocol Set Subnet field from 0 16 Art Net protocol Standard Motion global 3 objects 170 channels Control Protocol Dual Motion global 2 objects 132
135. ed Mod2 green Mod3 blue NA 0 0 M 2 opa Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 11 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 1e DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 15 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 16 RGB Invert Modi red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to 18 inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green 198 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 76 Effect Mode 2 Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 20 Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 21 Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 22
136. ed color values below the threshold are converted to cyan Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Blue color values below the threshold are converted to magenta Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Green color values below the threshold are converted to yellow Solarize 2 Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 10 This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and inverts the color above a set threshold Solarize options can create strong highlights Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Red color values above the threshold are converted to cyan Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Blue color values above the threshold are converted to magenta Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Green color values above the threshold are converted to yellow Solarize 3 Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 11 This effect option remaps colors to a narrow value range and eliminates the color below a set threshold Solarize options can create strong highlights Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100
137. ed or taped Surely don t need permission for that Public gatherings require clearance whenever copyrighted data is projected to audiences or for any use other than just personal viewing Concerts trade shows industrial shows parties and raves are all examples of public performance and permission must be obtained Suppose want to use a still photo or a magazine cover or a television clip Do have to obtain permission for them too Yes they are also copyrighted works whose owners must grant a license for their usage Do need any other permissions to use this material In many cases you do You may need to obtain permission to use the appearance of actors who appear in the clip as well as pay the writers and directors of the film that your clip comes from What about music hear you can use 8 bars for free 8 bars for free is a fallacy that has been passed around as a fact for a long period of time However it isn t true Both musical compositions and records require licensing and payment What about High End Systems material included with the DL 2 fixture Do I have to clear that No High End Systems has worked to provide clearance for the content that is provided with the DL 2 fixture Any materials you received directly from HES with the purchase of a new DL 2 fixture have already been properly licensed for your use in shows and presentations That does not however license you to sell this content separately from DL 2 fi
138. edia servers Name IP Address Software Version Model O brian 192 168 1 106 1 0 0 206 O two 192 168 1 108 1 0 0 218 M three 192 168 1 103 1 0 0 218 Next gt Cancel The cloning process erases all destination server s user content and replaces it with the selected server s user content Stock content is unaffected 148 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Deleting Content To delete all User Content from a server Delete Content 1 In the Management Client Window select All Server in the left pane HIGH END SYSTEMS 2 Select the Server with the content you want Dalla al comento lona to delete in the right pane 3 From the drop down menu or the right click popup list select Delete Content A dialog box OKs cancels the action DMX Summary The DMX Summary lets you view all the content for a single server in a table format with the following details Whether the content is a User Media file folder a Stock Media file folder or a 3D Object The associated Folder Name for media files The Folder DMX value for media files The File Name for media or object files The File DMX value for media or object files To view the DMX summary table 1 Select All Servers from the left pane of the Management Client Window 2 Select a Server in the right pane 3 Select DMX Summary from the drop down menu or the right click popup list 4 Press the Create Table
139. el The higher the value the more color detail will be removed Modifier 2 Adjust the image contrast from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum contrast PERLE Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 70 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Color to B W Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 7 Begins with a white screen and fades to the original image in black and white All color is converted Modifier 1 Transitions the image from full white at a DMX value of 0 to black and white at a value of 128 50 Increasing values above 50 reveals more of the image in black and white to complete at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Fire Gradient Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 8 This option maps image colors to a Red to Yellow gradient creating a fiery effect Modifier 1 Maps the image color values from no adjustment at a value of 0 to all red to yellow tones at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 8 Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 255 100 DL 2 User Manual 71 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Negative Art Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 This option provides a negative of t
140. els increases color values 2 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 2 magenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels 4 72 vira Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue T 0 0 nds RGB Add 2 All Pixels E Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels 6 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR 8 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color 9 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 194 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 72 Effect Mode 1 Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Mod red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 10 Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 11 Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 12 DotP and Resample Mod1 Mod2 and Moa3 control resampling 13 Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 14 All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 15 Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 16 RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue 17 RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red
141. ent from O no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from 0 no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Chromakey Medium Inverse Y Object Effect Y Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 30 A chromakey removes a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values The Inverse Chromakey Medium parameter selects a color range 25 either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as chromakeyed Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from 0 no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation 100 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions CMY Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 1 This parameter simulates CMY color by inverting RGB color components Use this parameter when you want to color mix with a CMY color model instead of RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases cyan color component
142. er Mod2 y lens center Mod lens size 37 Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity 38 NA DL 2 User Manual 211 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 39 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 5 RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls s transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Moa3 sets overall color range Effect Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on 114 Mode 2 Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 48 NA 0 0 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inver
143. ersion Table This table lists the MSpeed motor movement times and their corresponding DMX controller values If you have a numeric type DMX controller use the Value Decimal dec column If you have a fader type DMX controller use the Value Percentage column If your DMX controller allows you to program hex values use the Value hex column 0 15 255 100 FF 5 64 218 85 DA 22 10 181 71 B5 0 15 254 100 FE 5 94 217 85 D9 22 70 180 71 B4 0 17 253 99 FD 6 25 216 85 D8 23 30 179 70 B3 0 19 252 99 FC 6 56 215 84 D7 23 92 178 70 B2 0 21 251 98 FB 6 89 214 84 D6 24 54 177 69 B1 0 25 250 98 FA 7 22 213 84 D5 25 17 176 69 BO 0 29 249 98 F9 7 56 212 83 D4 25 80 175 69 AF 0 35 248 97 F8 7 91 211 83 D3 26 45 174 68 AE 0 41 247 97 F7 8 27 210 82 D2 27 10 173 68 AD 0 47 246 96 F6 8 63 209 82 D1 27 76 172 67 AC 0 55 245 96 F5 9 00 208 82 DO 28 43 171 67 AB 0 63 244 96 F4 9 39 207 81 CF 29 11 170 67 AA 0 73 243 95 F3 9 77 206 81 CE 29 80 169 66 AQ 0 83 242 95 F2 10 17 205 80 CD 30 49 168 66 A8 0 94 241 95 F1 10 58 204 80 CC 31 19 167 65 A7 1 05 240 94 FO 10 99 203 80 CB 31 90 166 65 A6 1 18 239 94 EF 11 41 202 79 CA 32 62 165 65 A5 1 31 238 93 EE 11 84 201 79 C9 33 34 164 64 A4 1 45 237 93 ED 12 28 200 78 C8 34 08 163 64 A3 1 60 236 93 EC 12 72 199 78 C7 34 82 162 64 A2 1 75 235 92 EB 13 17 198 78 C6 35 57 161 63 A1 1 92 234 92
144. es Default DMX Value 255 100 no masking effect When this parameter is set at a value of 255 100 the mask is sized to leave the image 100 visible When Mask Size is set at 0 the mask totally covers the composite image Tip Crossfading the Mask Size parameter can create unique fades to and from video black Mask Select DMX value 0 Mask Size DMX value 255 100 Mask Select value of 0 Mask Select DMX value 1 Mask Size DMX value 128 50 Mask Size DMX value 126 50 DL 2 User Manual 89 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Mask Edge Fade The Mask Edge Fade parameter diffuses the edge of your chosen mask Default DMX Value 0 no edge fade applied to mask Adjust the amount of edge fade from 1 no edge fade to 255 maximum edge fade When a Mask Select parameter value of Note A Global Effect Mode parameter option lets you define a Mask Edge Fade color on page 105 Original Image Mask applied without Edge Fade Mask with Edge Fade applied 90 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Image Edge Fade Four Image Edge Fade parameters let you control the Edge Fade for individual sides of your object top bottom left and right When projecting abutting images adjusting the Edge Fade parameter lets you smooth the line between two images and also allows you to change an object s boundary Default DMX Value 0 all edges are sharp and hard Adjust each side separately for edge fade
145. es see Upgrading DL 2 Fixture Software on page 150 Installing and Launching the Content Management Application CMA The Content Management Application software that shipped on CD with your fixture communicates with DL2 fixtures over an Ethernet network to Upload and download custom digital content to fixtures Remotely control all menu commands Update software The following are recommended hardware requirements for the CMA Windows XP or Mac OS 10 4 or later Microsoft Net Framework 1 1 with Service Pack 1 installed 100 1000 base Ethernet card a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for fast content uploading of large files After setting up your Ethernet network and linking all DL 2 fixtures and your computer Insert the CD that shipped with your fixture to automatically install the CMA on your harddrive For more information on CMA operation see Chapter 14 Content Management Application CMA on page 135 Note If the CMA doesn t automatically launch navigate to the dl2client msi file in your windows browser and double click to launch You can download the latest version of the CMA from the High End Systems website at www highend com support A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal computer When you launch the CMA it automatically finds and identifies all DL 2 fixtures on the fixture link Note To avoid problems with fixture communication over the ethernet link disable all firewall
146. es You can also reset Lamp and Fixture hours Info_Hours The Hours tab displays the Lamp and Fixture hours of operation since the last reset Selecting the Reset button resets the associated hours to zero Lamp hours should be reset to zero whenever a lamp is replaced Fixture Hours information is often used to track fixture hours for a show or a rental period The number field displays the number of hours the fixture has been operating since the last reset Pressing the Fixture Hours Reset returns the value to 0 LampHous 476 Reset 704 Reset g 5 154 1521 OMT a 35 XWA Info_Version Screen The Software Version field and Firmware Version field display software versions as V Major Minor Build A Fixture Name field displays a name for easy Lg um reference in developing your show using the Tilt Encd Version 1 0 Content Management Application g Unique ID 0011112F4B81 g Fixture Name 0011112F4B81 IP Address 192 168 1 100 Info Status Tab g i f X Status Message List This screen displays status errors and warnings S proj Status Cooling on items including A Filter Life Out Error Temperature z Filter life Lamp life i USB and Camera Communication USB Security sua SS For more detailed information see Supported Error Warning Messages on page 166 32 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Reset Screen The Reset scree
147. es images and 3 D objects that make up the content that the server uses These files folders and their associated DMX values are collectively known as the Content on the fixture Windows OS 2 All Servers 4 servers B User Content User Objects Stock Content Stock Objects B one 1 B three 3 B brian 5 O All Configuration The Content Management Application CMA organizes and identifies content by source preloaded Stock content or custom User content and type Media files or 3 D Object files For more information on using the CMA to view and manage content see Content Management Application CMA on page 135 Selecting Content Three Parameters control Content selection To define an image you have to set DMX values greater than 0 for the 3 D Object Media Folder and Media File parameters The selected media file will be mapped onto the selected 3 D object To output an image from a DL 2 fixture 1 Open the mechanical iris by setting the Dimmer parameter to full 10096 2 Set the Global Intensity parameter to full 100 3 Set the Object opacity to full 10096 4 Adjust the Object Media Folder and Media File parameters to greater than zero When programming with Wholehog software the Media Folder and Object parameters default to 1 so choosing any Media File DMX value from 1 35 will display a media loop from the HES Core folder Media Folder 1 wrapped on a Flat Plane Object 1
148. es below center move toward the maximum distance from origin in front of view target at a value of zero DL 2 User Manual 95 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions 96 DL 2 User Manual Chapter II Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effects can be applied to the Media File content texture mapped onto a 3 D object Multiple Color and Geometric options are available in Effect Mode Parameters for both individual Graphic object and Global control Most of the effect options you will find described in this chapter are available for Effects 1 and Effect 2 parameters at both the graphic control level for each Graphic Object as well as the Global control level for the composite image The following pages describe all the Effect Mode options available along with a description of how each Modifier parameter functions with that mode selected Check boxes in the upper right hand corner indicate Y Object Effect v Global Effect whether this mode is available as a Graphic Object Effect a Global Effect or both Because the options for Effect 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode are identical you can apply up to two options at the graphic level and another two options at the global level This lets you choose for example whether to apply a color effect option to an individual object or to the composite image at the global level After you select a mode using either a Graphic Object Effect Mode or a Global Effect Mode parameter you can use the three asso
149. eserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area 33 Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center 34 Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture 35 center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center 36 Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center 37 Effect Mod3 lens size 72 Mode 1 Cartoon Edge NA 0 0 Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast 38 Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 39 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mod3 not used 40 RGB Swap to BGR 41 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls 1 transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate 196 DL 2 User Manual
150. fault positions Home Home Motion Iris Resets mechanical functions for Iris Zoom and Zoom e Focus to default positions Focus Self Test On Selecting On starts a test sequence for Pan and Tilt Test Pan Tilt Off mechanical functionality es Self Test On Selecting On starts a test sequence for Iris Iris Off mechanical functionality Self Test On Selecting On starts a test sequence for Zoom Self Test Zoom Off mechanical functionality Self Test On Selecting On starts a test sequence for Focus Focus Off mechanical functionality Video On Selecting a Video Pattern and On displays a sample Test Off video to test graphics engine functionality Reboot Media Server Selecting Restart reboots the internal media server Reset Delete User Content Selecting Delete erases all User Content on server Upgrade Factory Content Selecting Upgrade installs updates to factory content requires connection to the CMA 24 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Menu Screen Descriptions Menu screens are presented on the display as a tabs Sub levels for a specific menu appear as that tab as is selected DMX Tab The DMX screen lets you configure the fixture S 3 Source for the DMX link view the DMX settings for the E 3 DMX512 fixture on each channel of its range and vie ee Ixture cnc e Its g i view E Protocol Start all 512 channel values on the DMX link tz Standard dad E
151. fect 0 133 Collage Mod1 grid style selection Mod2 grid portion displayed Mod3 edge blend adjustment 134 Corrects output for vertical convex cylinder Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 Not used 135 Corrects output for vertical concave cylinder Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 Not used 136 Corrects output for vertical inside corner Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint 137 Corrects output for vertical outside corner Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint 138 Curved Surface Sphere Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint 139 Curved Surface Convex Disk Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint 140 Reserved Defaults to effect 0 141 255 These Modifier parameters adjust the selected Global Effect 1 parameter option from no adjustment at 255 100 effect Off no effects selection ome ove s ee om v s ree foe s 0 0 NA APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB Reduces color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY adds to all pixels Increases color values Global 2 27 Effect 2 Mod1 cyan
152. ffect Mode Options Descriptions Horizontal Mirror Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 40 This option splits the image vertically and mirrors the image alongside it s original Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 sets the mirror center point at the center of the screen Values below the midpoint move the mirror center point toward the left as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint move the mirror center point toward the right as you approach 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Modifier 3 Not Used Magnifying Lens M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 36 This option applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a virtual convex lens effect over a portion of the image You can adjust the size of the lens and move it over different areas of the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the lens centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the lens centerpoint from O top edge to 255 10096 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the lens from O smallest to 255 100 largest Magnifying Lens 2 Y Object Effect Y Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 37 This option applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a doubled virtual convex lens over a portion of the image You can adj
153. fines a 3 D space and the Viewpoint Position parameters modify your viewing location with the defined 3 D space Each Viewpoint Mode uses three values to specify a viewpoint in space This point in space is specified by the horizontal angle vertical angle and zoom Within any 3 D space you can choose the viewpoint target as Center of 3 D space Center of Object 1 Center of Object 2 Center of Object 3 Default DMX Value 0 Perspective view Spherical Coordinates with the focus at the center of the 3 D space Perspective Vieui Spherical Coordinates This Viewpoint mode creates a 3 D space with a perspective view of a 3 D space Viewpoints are located in terms of X Y and Z positions located on a sphere surrounding the image D GLOBAL Z VIEWPOINT Global Viewpoint set with X Y and Z DL 2 output displayed with global positions all equal to zero viewpoint shown at left Perspective View Cartesian Coordinates This Viewpoint mode parameter creates a 3 D space with a perspective view Viewpoints are located in terms of rectangular X Y and Z positions describing a location in this space Orthogonal View Cartesian Coordinates This Viewpoint mode creates a 3 D space without perspective Viewpoint are located in terms of rectangular X Y and Z positions describing a location in this space In this case the composite image is always flat 94 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Viewpoint Position X T
154. from original color to 2 69 Visual Mode sepia colors Mod2 controls saturation NA 1 1 Red tones Mod1 fades from original color to red 3 tones Mod2 controls saturation Gray maker Mod1 compresses colors to shades 4 of gray Mod2 adjusts contrast DL 2 User Manual 193 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Gray maker2 Always gray Mod1 brightness Mod2 contrast Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 6 adjusts contrast Color to Black amp White Mod1 fades color RGB 50 to B W 50 to white 210096 Mod2 not 7 used Fire Gradient Mod1fades original to converted 8 Mod2 not used reserved 69 Visual Mode Negative Art Mod1 fades from original image to NA 1 1 converted image Mod2 subtracts red from 0 128 9 subtracts green from 129 255 Exposure Control Mod1 adjusts color contrast 10 Mod2 adjusts color shift Invert B amp W Keep Color Mod1 black T comparison level Mod2 white comparison level Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Pr 12 Crossfade from original to source texture Reserved defaults to Off 13 255 70 Sud Mage Adjusts selected Visual Mode from O to maximum 0 255 0 100 0 0 Modifier 1 71 Visual Mode Adjusts selected Visual Mode from O to maximum 0 255 0 100 0 0 Modifier 2 Off no effects selection 0 0 CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pix
155. function can be enabled from the DL 2 menu the CMA as well as remotely via DMX When Preview is enabled a partial full color video is shown on the LCD display along with the folder file and DMX information If there is no change of content on any Graphic Function it will automatically switch to full screen mode within 12 seconds The Preview function always shows the latest selected content without any modification of effects Preview mode displays movies and still images only S video and internal camera input will not be displayed in the Preview mode Note After selecting the On or Preview option you can use the numeric up down control to adjust the Menu display brightness level from 25 dim to 100 brightest 28 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Off turns off the display after 20 seconds of inactivity Touching any button on the fixture menu will re enable the display The Display I nvert field inverts the display and navigation control functions This is useful in certain fixture orientations There are three invert control options On manually inverts the display and navigation buttons Off manually turns off the display invert function Auto sets the display to invert automatically when the fixture is rotated more than 45 off the horizontal axis This is the default setting The Multiple SVideo Format field lets you designate which SVideo format the fixture will accept DL 2 fixtures suppo
156. g and mineral oil DL 2 is a highly complex and sensitive electro optical device and care and thought in how it is used rigged and positioned will maximize the product s life and your investment Note Failure to follow these guidelines and carry out regular maintenance will void the warranty 8 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Mounting the Fixture Upright CAUTION N Do not mount the fixture upright without the four rubber feet attached To mount the fixture upright place the fixture on a sturdy stable surface that will support more than the 53 5 kg 118 lb weight of the DL 2 fixture If the surface is above floor height use safety cables to secure the fixture to the surface Truss Mounting When mounting the fixture on a truss or another type of support Verify the truss or support will handle the combined weight of all the devices on the truss Always mount the DL 2 fixture with the mounting bracket assembly that shipped with your fixture and a safety cable attached using the mounting bracket to the fixture s base WARNI NG Before mounting disconnect power to the fixture If it has been AN operating allow the fixture to cool for five minutes before handling CAUTI ON Do not use C Clamps to mount the DL 2 fixture to truss Use the following steps to mount a DL 2 fixture on a standard truss 1 Due to it s size and weight at least two people should support the fixture while anot
157. g this menu tab Motion All option on this manually homes the entire fixture Motion Pan Tilt homes only pan and tilt positions Motion Iris Zoom Focus sets the Iris Zoom and Focus to default CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Motion All Home Motion Pan Tilt Home 3 Motion Iris Zoom Focus Home Calibrate Motors Calibrat Info File Rst Test e Calibrate Motors realigns the Pan and Tilt stepper motors after maintenance procedures The DL 2 can also be remotely homed via a DMX controller see Control Function Options on page 128 or through the Content Management Application see Editing Configuration Values on page 152 Test_Self Test Screen You can check the mechanical functionality of Pan Tilt Iris Zoom and Focus assemblies on the fixture head Select On to start the test sequence The Video Test option opens the mechanical iris and provides test patterns to check the projection functionality This lets you verify that the graphics engine is operating without having to use a DMX controller Self Test Pan Tit Off gt y Self Test Iris Off Y Self Test Zoom Off Self Test Focus Off Video Test Test Pattern 1 Off 4 Test Info File DL 2 User Manual 31 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Info Tab The Info tab displays current fixture information such as hardware and software versions sensor Status total fixture and lamp hours DMX errors and Status valu
158. he DL 2 Menu System earth guid Pista s Options Function Notes NTSC_M NTSC_MJ PAL_B PAL_D PAL_G PAL_H PAL I External PALM di Fixture SVideo PAL_N Identifies the SVideo format used for video input SECAM_B SECAM_D SECAM_G SECAM_H SECAM_K SECAM_K1 SECAM_L SECAM_L1 Factory On Restores factory default settings Defaults Off Default Projector Externa Chooses the input the Projector will accept Input Internal T Projector In Yes ed A ds projector s input source to be by DMX No Disables changing projector input via DMX Projector On Manually turns Projector Lamp on Lamp Off Manually turns Projector Lamp off Turns the projector lamp on whenever the fixture is Always connected to power Projector Turns on the projector lamp when Projector Lamp Startup Manual On i Mode Projector Turns the projector lamp on with DMX DMX input default Projector On Navigation buttons control Projector Menu System OSD Menu Off Navigation buttons control Fixture Menu System Zoom On On Overrides the DMX values sent by the console Override Off Set value manually from 0 255 Focus On On Overrides the DMX values sent by the console Override Off Set value manually from 0 255 Projector Defaults Selecting button restores Factory Projector Defaults Projector On Rotates the image 180 degrees Ceiling Off Default Projector On Inverts the image for
159. he DMX value is increased from the midpoint the image is enlarged In addition when the DMX value is reduced below the midpoint an inverted image is enlarged Use the X Y and Z Scale parameters together to enlarge or shrink a 3 D object proportionally X Scale The X Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the x axis either expanding it or making it smaller Use it when you want to size the object s horizontal component A DMX value of 128 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the object horizontally to the smallest at 0 Values greater then 50 enlarge the object horizontally to the largest at 255 100 Default DMX Value 128 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 X Scale DMX value 165 All Scale DMX values 128 50 Scaled 3 times in X direction 56 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Y Scale The Y Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the y axis either expanding it or making it smaller Use it when you want to size the object s vertical component A DMX value of 128 5096 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 5096 shrink the object vertically to the smallest at 0 Values greater then 5096 enlarge the object vertically to the largest at 255 10096 Default DMX Value 128 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 Y Scale parameter DMX value 165 All Scal
160. he Viewpoint Position X parameter determines the x component of the viewpoint position to the target you have specified in the Viewpoint Mode parameter The horizontal angle is the angle around the vertical y axis Heading is another name for this angle Default DMX Value 32768 center DMX values above center of the range move counterclockwise to the maximum horizontal angle at a value of 65535 100 DMX values below the center move clockwise to the minimum horizontal angle at a value of 0 Viewpoint Position Y The Viewpoint Position Y parameter sets the vertical angle above below the horizontal plane Pitch is another name for this component of the viewpoint position Default DMX Value 32768 center DMX values above the center of the range move counterclockwise to the maximum vertical angle at a value of 65535 100 DMX values below the center move clockwise to the minimum vertical angle at a value of 0 Vieuipoint Position Z CZoom The View point Position Z Zoom parameter is the distance from the view target Zooming toward the target you can move through it and view it from the back side creating an mirror image view of the composite object Default DMX Value 30260 center This default value is slightly less than midway through the range to maintain some depth to the view of a composite image DMX values above center move toward the maximum distance from origin in back of view target a DMX value of 65535 DMX valu
161. he image and then lets you adjust the amount of color and the red and green color components Modifier 1 Adjusts the color level from full at a DMX value of 0 to the lowest level at a DMX value of 255 Modifier 2 You must set a DMX value of 128 to see no black level adjustment Red is subtracted from the image at DMX values of 128 to 0 Green is subtracted from the image at DMX values of 129 255 Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 Modifier 1 DMX value 0 Modifier 2 DMX value 0 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 Modifier 1 DMX value 0 Modifier 1 DMX value 255 100 Modifier 2 DMX value 128 50 Modifier 2 DMX value 128 50 72 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects xposure Control Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 10 Exposure Control adjusts the image Black level and Contrast to optimize the projected image for your performance environment You can use it to easily modify the black level and contrast for a specific application Exposure Control provides finer Contrast and Black level control than than the Content Optimization option which pushes colors to saturation more quickly Modifier 1 Adjusts black level from O full black through 255 100 brightest At a DMX value of 128 50 there is no adjustment Modifier 2 from 0 least contrast through 255 100 maximum contrast At a DMX value of 128 50 there is
162. her attaches clamps and safety cables Always stand on a firm stable surface when mounting a fixture to its support 2 Mount the clamps that shipped with fixture to the mounting brackets and then attach the two mounting brackets to the base of the fixture using the provided quarter turn screws Bracket screw holes R3 A cable loop DL 2 User Manual 9 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration 3 Tighten the clamps firmly to the fixture s base and to the support 4 Run the safety cable through the loop on the fixture s base and around the truss Note High End Systems does not recommend operation of the DL 2 fixture with the base perpendicular to the stage floor fixture mounted sideways Sideways mounting will result in significantly decreased lamp life Linking DL 2 Fixtures DL 2 fixtures can be linked with other fixtures on a standard DMX512 link using XLR cabling and then controlled by a DMX desk The number of fixtures on a link will be determined by the combined number of channels required by all the fixtures The DMX channel range of a DL 2 fixture is determined by the protocol mode you choose Standard Protocol 170 channels Dual Protocol 132 channels Single Protocol 94 channels Use data grade cable and 5 pin XLR cable connectors Data grade cable is designed to carry a high qua
163. ht clicking in the right pane when files are being displayed 2 HighEnd DL2 Management Client al xj File MediaFiles Help d Details Refresh Thumbnails Small Thumbnails Medium Thumbnails Large E All Servers 1 EP Susan 2 4 User Content User Objects EME Stock Content ic Amorphous_Digi_ 003 004 005 001 002 SD Arcticlight mv SD_Baitview2 mv SD Beerush mv2 SD_Bubbles mv2 SD Cloud007 mv 5 Apollo Glass 2 Artbeats 3 a luna blue 4 15 Beacon 5 D DIA TOpM ac B 008 014 SD_Lavalamp 021 022 006 SD_Cloud010 my SD Deep l mv2 3 fps mv2 m2v 8 SD Rip mv2 m2v 9 SD Rollup mv2 m fi Min E 025 027 023 SD_Slink 024 026 3 fps mv2 m2v 11 SD Smeltmv2 m SD_Softripple mw2 SD Spotlight mv2 SD Stack mv2 m2v Digital Arials 2 7 Digit Airials 1 8 OEA 15 HES Atmospheric HES Foliage 11 15 HES Gothic 12 HES Logos 13 ic HES Setup and T 140 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Managing User Content All Stock and User content can be viewed and refreshed but the CMA client gives you additional control over other aspects of your custom content Within the CMA window you can Rename user files and folders Delete files and folders Control DMX value assignment to files and folders Move files and folders between your local drive and a DL 2 fix
164. ic objects and the Axon media server is a DL 2 fixture without the motion fixture type In the Fixture Schedule or Add Fixtures window of Wholehog software add 1 motion 1 global and 3 graphic fixtures for each complete DL 2 unit The best way to organize your patching is to assign user numbers for these items Patch the motion first the global second and the graphic fixture types last For example set up user numbers 1 5 that correspond to DL 2 fixture number 1 where user number 1 is the motion 2 is the global and 3 5 the graphic fixture types DMX Output Displays Although all lighting consoles output the same 512 DMX channels per universe the on screen labeling often differs Parameter functions are displayed in either alpha numeric descriptions strobe 1 percentage 0 100 or decimal 0 255 for 8 bit and 0 65535 for 16 bit Consult your lighting console manual for further information 36 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics 16 bit DMX Individual access of the two DMX channels used with 16 bit parameters varies by lighting console Most modern DMX consoles bind these two channels into a single 16 bit parameter to accurately perform 16 bit crossfades Consult your lighting console manual for further information Wholehog lll Programming Notes Play Speed You can adjust the Play Speed using the encoder wheel on the Beam parameter of the Graphic fixture type Additionally you can press enable a
165. igned DMX values for folders and files To create a Content Archive 1 In the Management Client Window select All Server in the left pane 2 Select the Server with the content you want to backup in the right pane 3 Select Create Content Archive from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list Deploying a Content Archive Deploying the Content Archive you created restores the user content to a fixture To replicate this content to other fixtures on the link use the Clone Content feature see Cloning User Content on page 148 DL 2 User Manual 147 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Cloning User Content Cloning is a file transfer operation where all the User Content of a single fixture is replicated across one or more other fixtures Cloning preserves all user content naming and DMX values This allows you for example to send the custom content for a specific show to all the fixtures used in that show with one operation To clone user content 1 In the Management Client Window select All Server in the left pane 2 Select the Server with the content you want to clone in the right pane 3 Select Clone Content from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list A Clone Content Wizard lets you select one or more servers on the fixture network as the destination for the cloned content Clone Content Wizard HIGH END SYSTEMS Select the destination m
166. imum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 10096 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed Texture Ripple Vertical M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 23 Varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the y axis without affecting the underlying object Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 10096 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed DL 2 User Manual 123 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Tiling Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 48 Tiling varies the number of times a media file is applied as a texture to an object This effect works best on objects that have an undisrupted surface area Modifier 1 Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the x a
167. in Cable and Connector Specifications on page 235 Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link DL 2 fixtures utilize an Ethernet network to synchronize playback and access the CMA software for remote content management and fixture configuration If you are using a DMX console and other automated lighting products compatible with ethernet this network can also serve as the link for DMX control Linking Configurations The following diagrams show configuration options for linking DL 2 fixtures to each other via ethernet for accessing the Content Management Application running on your computer and to the DMX512 link for DMX desk control DMX Universe 2 Mes Laptop Compute WholeHog 3 Console M DMX 512 Data Cabling Ethernet Cabling Configuration Option 1 DL 2 User Manual 11 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration DMX Universe 1 DMX Universe 2 WholeHog 3 Console ais la DMX 512 Data Cabling Ethernet Cabling Configuration Option 2 Powering On the Fixture WARNING This equipment is designed for connection to a branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A CAUTION Do not power on the fixture until verifying that the line cord cap is suitable for the power source in your location For more information see Attaching a Power Cord Cap on page 6 To power on the DL 2 fixture simply connect it to an appropriately rated power source It is very important that you shutdown and disconnect p
168. inal center center size DL 2 User Manual 83 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Effect Mode Adjustments DMX 3 T Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier 2 Modifier 3 Value Magnifying Lens applies spherical overlay 36 s X lens center Y lens center Lens size that magnifies a portion of the texture Magnifying L 2 li herical 37 agm yng d app boh Salon MI Xlens center Y lens center Lens size that magnifies a portion of the texture Edge Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around Enhances 38 Reduces Color detection picture elements Contrast a sensitivity Color DeConverge separates image color Moves Red Moves Green Moves Blue 39 components and offsets them from original component component position component up Defines mirror down and right down and left 40 Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect benter Not Used Not Used 41 RGB Swap to BGR Red to Blue Green Blue to Red 42 RGB Swap to RBG Red Green to Blue Blue to Green 43 RGB Swap to GRB Red to Green Green to Red Blue m Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to Selects Color Selects zero Controls color Scheme intensity point fading F Defines 45 Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity Selects Color Intensity Controls transparent Scheme bandwidth Transparency 46 Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a Controls size seeds random controls
169. inator capable of capturing live video even in 4 blackout conditions The camera is mounted on the front of the DL 2 near the projector iris to point wherever the DL 2 fixture is directed DL 2 front view All of the camera functions can be controlled via a DMX console see Controlling the Internal Camera Input on page 133 Other Video Sources A DL 2 fixture can also project other live video sources connected to the DL 2 fixture s RGBHV VGA or S Video input ports With S Video input the live video can be further enhanced and manipulated by the DL 2 s graphics engine Note You can configure the graphics engine to capture video from an external source or the internal camera but not from both at the same time DL 2 User Manual 131 CHAPTER 13 Live Video Input and Control Live Video Connection Options The DL 2 fixture has video connectors for RGBHV VGA and S Video on its rear panel as shown in the following figure M H B G R J CAMERA VIDEO VGA our IN IN VGA input to l the projector RGBHV input option S Video Camera to the projector Output to another DL 2 fixture or device S Video In to the graphics engine CAUTI ON To avoid damaging the fixture and voiding the warranty do not physically connect to the RGBHV and VGA inputs at the same time Configuring the Video Input Source DL 2 fixtures support multiple SVideo formats including NTSC_M PAL_B PAL_H SECAM_B SE
170. ine Parameters for composite image rotation position and global scale are described in Chapter 10 Global Functions Note The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output Rotating a 3 D Object The Rotation parameters for each object control 3 D object rotation with 16 bit precision You can rotate a 3 D object up to 720 in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction around the X Y and or Z axis Note Remember that rotation changes could affect an object s relationship to other objects When you rotate an object you are rotating it around the selected axis X Rotation produces the effect of a top to bottom flip Y Rotation produces a left to right flip Z Rotation causes a circular motion X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation Rotates image Rotates image Rotates image about the x axis about the y axis about the z axis DL 2 User Manual 51 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale The Rotation parameters suggested default values are the midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range which is equal to no rotation Increasing the DMX value from the midpoint indexes the object in a clockwise direction Reducing the DMX value below the midpoint indexes the object in a counterclockwise direction When the DMX value for a rotation parameter is greater than the 720 limit in either direction
171. ing Like all high quality video projection units the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke The DL 2 fixture incorporates two stage air filtering to reduce these risks to a minimum however the user must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check Do not situate DL 2 fixtures in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer Minimize the exposure of DL 2 fixtures to both glycol fog and mineral oil The DL 2 fixture is a highly complex and sensitive electro optical device and care and thought in how it is used rigged and positioned will maximize the product s life and your investment Failure to follow these guidelines and carry out regular maintenance will void the warranty Packaged Media Notice Any use of this product other than consumer personal use in any manner that complies with the MPEG 2 Standard for encoding video information for packaged media is expressly prohibited without a license under applicable patents in the MPEG 2 patent portfolio which license is available from MPEG LA L L C 250 Steele Street Suite 300 Denver Colorado 80206 Warranty Information Limited Warranty Unless otherwise state
172. ion Camera Effects Red Gain Blue Gain APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Auto Exposure Full Auto 0 63 0 25 Auto Exposure Shutter Priority Shutter Speed 30 edd as Auto Exposure Shutter Priority i Shutter Speed 15 e 2808 Auto Exposure Shutter Priority Shutter Speed 8 TEESE tree Auto Exposure Shutter Priority E 3 Shutter Speed 4 Tees ee Auto Exposure Shutter Priority 5 Shutter Speed 2 189219 9788 Auto Exposure Shutter Priority i Shutter Speed 1 up PINO Auto Balance 0 63 0 25 Indoor 64 95 26 38 Outdoor 96 127 39 49 Enable Manual Red and Blue gain value 128 191 50 74 adjustment Reserved no change from previous state 192 255 75 100 Flip OFF Mirror OFF 0 63 0 25 Flip OFF Mirror ON 64 127 26 50 Flip ON Mirror OFF 128 191 51 75 Flip ON Mirror ON 192 255 76 100 Freeze Frame OFF Negative Art B amp W OFF 0 63 0 25 Freeze Frame ON Negative Art B amp W OFF 64 127 26 49 Freeze Frame OFF Negative Art B amp W ON 128 159 50 62 Freeze Frame ON Negative Art B amp W ON 160 191 63 75 Freeze Frame OFF B amp W ON 192 223 76 88 Freeze Frame ON B amp W ON 224 255 89 100 Red gain adjustment Requires White Balance 7 i Mode 128 191 eee 07100 Blue Gain adjustment Requires White Balance 0 255 0 100 Mode 128 191 DL 2 User Manual 179 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Global Functions Standard
173. ion 3 9 Synch to Graphic movie time and rotation 1 10 Synch to Graphic movie time and rotation 2 11 Synche to Graphic movie time and rotation 3 12 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 1 13 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 14 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 3 15 Reserved Defaults to mode 0 no selection 16 255 No Selection 0 Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 1 Sync to Fixture ID Number 2 2 NA 0 0 Sync to Fixture Number 254 254 Sync to Fixture ID Number 255 255 Graphic 3 Effects Off No visual mode processing applied to output 0 Content Optimization 1 Mod black level Mod2 contrast Sepia tones Mod1 fades from original color to 2 sepia colors Mod2 controls saturation NA 1 1 Red tones Mod1 fades from original color to red 3 tones Mod2 controls saturation Gray maker Mod1 compresses colors to shades 4 of gray Mod2 adjusts contrast DL 2 User Manual 217 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Gray maker2 Always gray Mod1 brightness 5 Mod2 contrast Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 6 adjusts contrast Color to Black amp White Mod1 fades color RGB 0 to B W 50 to white 100 Mod2 not 7 used Fire Gradient Mod1fades original to converted 8 Mod2 not used reserved 145 Visual Mode Negative Art Mod1 fades from original image to NA 1 1 converted image Mod2 subtracts red fro
174. ions in the motion fixture only operate if the dimmer changes from gt 0 to 0 at the same time or just after a change is made to the control channel See the DL2 protocol for specific information DL 2 User Manual 37 CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics 38 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 5 Graphics Engine Overview The DL 2 fixture s graphic engine software gives you control over content selection playback 3 D environment you will use to select image and project 3 D Video Lighting Content Working in the DL 2 3 D Environment DL 2 fixtures provide individual and composite graphical control for up to three 3 D Objects You can control the footprint of the fixture on a DMX link by choosing to implement only the number of 3 D objects your application requires Select the protocol level in the fixture s onboard menu system see DMX Tab on page 25 Protocol Selection dum Standard Protocol 170 Dual Protocol 132 Single Protocol 94 Image Optimizing Controls Images can now be optimized for each cue It is no longer necessary to pre optimize images with a separate software system on a separate computer when preparing for a show You can adjust both Black Level and Contrast for each cue and for each image Graphics Control Hierarchy There is a hierarchy to the DMX control parameters In general object control parameters render individual graphic images Global control parameters act upon the composite
175. ions o Display 100 j On Set the Pan Invert option On to invert the g Display Invert Auto direction of the pan motor Use this option to External SVideo Format INTSC M coordinate movements between fixtures facing amp each other in a horizontal orientation Off is the Factory Defaults Off j default setting Set the Tilt I nvert option On to invert the direction of the tilt motor Use this option to coordinate movements between fixtures facing each other in a vertical orientation Off is the default setting Setting Pan Tilt Swap option On swaps the pan and tilt motor operation to coordinate movements between fixtures mounted perpendicular to each other Off is the default setting Timeout Options The Dimmer Iris closes when it stops receiving DMX data for a designated time interval The Data Loss Timeout I ris option sets the DMX data loss time interval as Long 5 minutes or Short 5 seconds Short is the default setting After 10 minutes of no data the fixture will shut down the projector and the motion functions Fans remain on to maintain the temperature control for the internal graphics engine Display Options The Display field lets you adjust the black level of the Menu display with the following options On is the factory default Preview displays the most recent media change of any Graphic function when opacity gt 0 The DL 2 Menu screen displays content in both partial and full screen The Preview
176. it Displays the media file for each graphic object 33 with up to the first three effects applied to it Reserved 34 255 Text color red Text color blue Text color green o mi o APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol NA DL 2 User Manual 191 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Graphic 1 Functions Standard Dual Single Protocol Opacity transparent 0 to opaque 255 25 Graphic 1 Content Definition No selection 0 0 First Stock 3 D Object flat plane 1 1 58 E Object Additional Stock 3 D Objects 2 149 0001 First User 3 D Objects 150 NA Additional User Objects 151 255 No selection 0 HES Folder 1 1 HES Folders 2 40 2 40 59 Media Folder First User Folder 41 41 NA 0 0 User Folders 42 239 42 239 Reserved 240 254 Integrated video camera capture The Media File 255 parameter is ignored No selection 0 0 60 MediaFile First Media File 1 NA 0 0 Additional Media Files 2 255 2 255 AENEIS eo 64 OutFrame QT of the movielengh ggsas 0 100 85595 100 Play forward looping continuously 0 0 Play forward once and hold on the last frame 1 Pause 2 Play forward if opacity gt 0 hold on last frame 3 Play forward if opacity gt 0 looping continuously 4 Pause and rewind to In Frame 5 65 Play Mode Scrub Display the selected In Frame 6 NA 9 9 Scrub Display the selected Out Frame 7 Scru
177. itude Frequency Phase Phase and 24 Texture Ripple Circular Amplitude Frequency Direction 25 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Amplitude Frequency Phase 26 Chromakey Fine Red Green Blue 27 Chromakey Medium Red Green Blue 28 Chromakey Coarse Red Green Blue 29 Chromakey Fine Inverse Red Green Blue 30 Chromakey Medium Inverse Red Green Blue 31 Chromakey Coarse Inverse Red Green Blue gt fades to 32 Scan line converts image colors to colors in a selects scan converted Not Used single line of the image line image Transparent Wipes opens the selected Selects from 33 graphic to reveal another graphic positioned Area of wipe Selects center 6 wipe ae of wipe behind it options direction and 94 Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture x twist center y twist center amount of twist 35 Picture in picture duplicates the texture and x subpicture y subpicture subpicture overlays it on the original center center size DL 2 User Manual 75 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects DMX Effect Mode Adjustments Value Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier 2 Modifier 3 36 Magnifying lens applies spherical ov ilay that x lens center y lens center lens size magnifies a portion of the texture 37 Magnifying lens 2 applies spherical Overlay that x lens center y lens center lens size magnifies a por
178. ization Each fixture on the network is assigned a fixture ID The Sync To parameter setting selects the ID of the fixture on the network that will provide the synchronization information to all other fixtures on the network Currently synchronization can be with only one fixture The Synchronization server is selected with the Sync To parameter channel of Graphic Object One The Sync To parameter channels for Graphic Objects 2 and 3 are reserved and default to 0 Tip For sync to work all fixtures should be assigned a Unique Fixture ID using the menu system see DMX Control Screen on page 25 or through the CMA see Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration on page 151 80 DL 2 User Manual Chapter lO Global Functions Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining two or three separate object graphics You can adjust intensity define masks select a point in space to view the composite image and control keystone correction Global Intensity The Global Intensity parameter creates a smooth fade to video black that doesn t affect the opacity relationship between individual objects Use this parameter to adjust the intensity of a composite image over the separate Graphic Object s Opacity parameter settings Increase intensity from not visible at a DMX value of 0 to full intensity at a value of 255 100 Default DMX Value 0 no intensity video black Tip The Dimmer Object Opacity and Globa
179. justs the image s bottom edge diffusion from 0 255 hard edge 0 to maximum fade 255 Adjusts the image s left edge diffusion from hard 0 255 edge 0 to maximum fade 255 Global Keystone Correction Move top left corner x value to center 0 255 Move top left corner y value to center 0 255 Move top right corner x value to center 0 255 Move top right corner y value to center 0 255 Move bottom right corner x value to center 0 255 Move bottom right corner y value to center 0 255 Move bottom left corner x value to center 0 255 Move bottom left corner y value to center 0 255 Shifts the image density along the X axis 0 255 Shifts the image density along the Y axis 0 255 NA 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 255 ojo o oj o jo o 128 128 100 oj jo o o o o jo OoO oa o ojo DL 2 User Manual 189 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Global View point Look at point center of universe 0 Look at point graphic 1 1 Look at point graphic 2 2 NA Look at point graphic 3 3 Look at point center of universe 4 0 i i Look at point graphic 1 5 4g Viewpoint p l grap i o io Mode Look at point graphic 2 6 NA Look at point graphic 3 7 Look at point center of universe 8 0 Look at point graphic 1 9 Look at
180. k peg to the upper left locked position O 3 Gently move the projector head and yoke to verify that both pan and tilt positions are locked 0 d in place DL 2 User Manual 17 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration 4 Place the DL 2 fixture in its provided road case for shipping 1 Place Top over the fixture first 2 Bring sides of case together and latch 18 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System You can use the DL 2 fixture s Menu System to configure the fixture review diagnostic feedback and view content information The DL 2 fixture use a 5 LCD screen to display the onboard menu system Navigation and select buttons let you move to different tab levels and options displayed on the Menu screen Note You can also access most Menu options through the CMA see Chapter 14 Content Management Application CMA on page 135 Certain options can also be controlled remotely via a DMX console s Control channel see Control Function Options on page 128 Menu Panel Components System Tab Select Buttons Menu Display State LEDs Menu Tabs Adjustments E 3 F i O if Source E 3 DMX512 C CE E Protocol Start i Standard q Channel M O Fixture ID HIGHENDSystams 0 j Display LED Escape Enter P Active Screen displays the Mu
181. l Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Intensity parameters all need DMX values greater Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 255 100 than 0 for a defined image to be visible Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Global Intensity DMX 128 50 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 179 70 DL 2 User Manual 81 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Global Effect Mode and Effect Mode 2 There are two Global Effect Mode parameters each with three modifier parameters Both Effect Mode parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect options This lets you apply a dual effect combination to the composite image The table below describes the interaction between an Effect Mode parameter and the three associated Modifier parameters for each option You can find a detailed description of each option in Chapter 11 Effect Mode Descriptions on page 93 Note Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog 3 system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog 3 functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Effect Mode 2 Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 Effect Mode Adjustments DMX NS m ee E Value Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier 2 Modifier 3 0 Safe no effects se
182. l Network Connectors sssssssss m mme emen 235 DMX and RS 485 Projector Link ssssessssssssses m mene 235 Appendix E Safety I nformation eese nnn 237 Appendice E Importantes Informations Sur La S curit ssssssssse 238 Anhang E Wichtige Hinweise F r Ihre Sicherheit sssssseeseeeseesssee 239 Ap ndice E Informaci n Importante De Seguridad ococcoccccnnconnncconencnnncnnnnonos 240 Appendice E Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza sess 241 Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation ssssssssssssssssse meme emnes 241 DL 2 User Manual xix DL 2 User Manual Chapter Product Overview This chapter describes the features and specifications of the DL 2 fixture and the Content Management Application software The DL 2 Digital Light 2 fixture merges video projection and automated lighting technologies with a DMX controllable digital media server housed in a moving yoke fixture The built in 32 bit Graphics Engine utilizes Windows XP Embedded and DirectX application programming interface to provide extensive image control of up to three 3 D graphic objects DL 2 fixtures use DMX512 protocol to control hardware functions like pan tilt and zoom as well as media control functions including loading images and movies and mapping them onto 3 D graphical objects The internal graphics engine lets you manipulate position scale ro
183. l view of content will note incompatible files with an X Creating Video Media Files Cleaner on Mac and Expert HD or TMPGEncoder on PC for encoding solutions offer good quality and the most reliable DL 2 playback Any encoder you use will need to provide options that achieve the following specifications Size to 640x480 pixels All I frames an frame every 1 frame for optimal tracking Constant Bit Rate CBR data rates of 10 to 12 megabits sec Closed Group of Picture GOP Sequence headers each GOP every frame Progressive frames since it s a progressive display device not interlaced End of sequence Sequence Style All the encoders have demos and will batch encode ExpertHD need a small script and a settings file to batch encode TMPGEncoder includes filters that let you light optimize in the encoder Creating 3 D Objects In general any 3 D modeling program can be used to create objects If the particular 3 D modeler does not export in DirectX x format a translation program will be needed to translate the object from the modeler s output format to the DirectX x format For example you can use Newtek s Lightwave 3 D modeler to generate 3 D objects in lwo format and then convert the object to x format using Deep Exploration from Right Hemisphere The following list includes some general notes and tips for creating a custom 3 D object With the control parameters position scaling and rotation
184. lders The High End Systems Digital Lighting Community forums highend com is a resource for tips and techniques on creating User Content See Custom User Content on page 231 for basic considerations in developing your own content for the DL 2 fixture Media Files Inside User Image and Stock Image folders are Library folders containing collections of media files Media files can be still images or video clips in one of the following formats Jpg gif png bmp mpv mlv mpg m2v Note DL 2 supports jpg formatted using RGB color CMYK color files are not currently supported The stock media files provided by High End Systems have been compressed and optimized for reliable and smooth playback from DL 2 fixtures Each file and folder has an associated DMX 138 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA value These values are fixed for Stock Content but must be assigned for all user created content See the Assigning DMX Values to User Content on page 141 for more information HighEnd DL2 Management Client Beh File Media Files Help HIGH END SYSTEMS B S All Servers 1 server EB Susan 2 E 000 Amorphous Long Traile mv2 m m2v 1 38 929KB 10 5 2004 3 01 04 PM H User Content E 001 Blue 70s mv2 m2v mv 2 13 033KB 10 5 2004 3 00 34 PM User Objects E 002 Bright Psych mv2 m2v m2v 3 28 316KB 10 5 2004 3 00 22 PM C eR umm E 003 Max Psych mv2m2v m
185. lect and Strobing ssesssssssssssssese em emen 88 Mask Shapes ss tetti eec eet RR NR VIT haa ade E iS NER CERE 88 Strobing Mask SHAPES sindicar en 88 DL 2 User Manual xiii WE ESITA A ete re ERRAT cheb ec Oden OET 89 Mask Edge Fad swiat petes oL euet qo Ive ata EUM lUe mbes 90 Image Edge Fade oo e eee tte eee eret eere etx del de ea ets gera tr tnis ds 91 Keystone Correction Parameters ocononocncnorannnnncnnrannnrnnnnrnnnnrancnnrncnnrncanancanans 92 X Ratio 93 Y Ratio 93 Global View point Mode ccscceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeaeeeeeeeaeaeeaesaeeaeaseaes 94 Perspective View Spherical Coordinates ssessssssess teeta anna 94 Perspective View Cartesian Coordinates cccececeee eee ee eee eee ee eae etna eaten 94 Orthogonal View Cartesian Coordinates cccece cece eect eee e eee ee men 94 Viewpoint Position X comoonccnnnonannncannncnnnncnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnennnnrnnnncananennanrnnanennas 95 Viewpoint Position Y 2cccceeeeee cence cence eee eee eee eases eee anunn aun aun nana n nanus ain nnn 95 Viewpoint Position Z Zoom use eeesseeeseeeee enema nnn nnns 95 Chapter 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effects can be applied to the Media File content texture mapped onto a 3 D object Multiple Color and Geometric options are available i
186. lection NA NA NA 1 CMY RGB inverse Cyan Magenta Yellow 2 CMY Add All Pixels Cyan Magenta Yellow 3 CMY Add All Non black Pixels Cyan Magenta Yellow 4 RGB Add All Pixels Red Green Blue 5 RGB Add 2 All Pixels Red Green Blue 6 RGB Add All Non black Pixels Red Green Blue 7 RGB Swap to GBR Red to Green Green to Blue Blue to Red 8 RGB Swap to BRG Red to Blue Green to Red Blue to Green 9 jdn 1 If color value DMX value invert Red G een Blue 10 Solarize 2 If color value gt DMX invert color Red Green Blue 11 Solarize 3 If color value lt DMX set color to O Red Green Blue 12 Solarize 4 If color value gt DMX set color to 0 Red Green Blue 13 DotP and Resample Red Green Blue 14 Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed Red Green Blue M RN pea oron sue 16 Solid color RGB Red Green Blue 17 RGB Invert From Red to From Green to From Blue to Inverted Red Inverted Green Inverted Blue 82 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 10 Global Functions behind it Effect Mode Adjustments DMX Eun 2e ies i Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier 2 Modifier 3 Value From Red to From Green to From Blue to 18 BAB Invertand Swap to GBR Inverted Red Inverted Green Inverted Blue From Green to F R F Blue t 19 RGB Invert and Swap to BRG rom R d to Inverted e Inverted Red Inverted Blue Green Horizontal Vertical Comparison 20 Edg
187. list As files are uploaded to fixtures the User interface displays progress information and notifies the user of any naming conflicts when files are renamed 144 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA A newly uploaded file or folder will have a default DMX value of zero If a naming conflict occurs you will be prompted before overwriting the file Mac OS X File transfer SMB limitation is 4GB file size per transfer What this means is more than 4GB of data may be transferred but no file can be greater than 4GB in size Moving Files Between Fixtures The CMA can transfer both individual files or entire folders between fixtures The DMX values assigned to the files are transferred along with the files themselves You can also simultaneously transfer files from one fixture to a group of fixtures DL 2 User Manual 145 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Archiving User Content An Archive Image is a compressed file used to store media files folders and object files along with valid identification DMX values This Content Archive is used to backup User Content that can be restored to any DL 2 server Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline You can create a Local Archive of files stored on your harddrive to be deployed to a server at another time This lets you work on organizing files for a specific show offline and then upload it to a server at a later date C
188. lity signal with less susceptibility to electromagnetic interference and less degradation over long distances For cable and connector specification see Cable and Connector Specifications on page 257 Test each cable with a voltage ohm meter VOM to verify correct polarity and to make sure that the negative and positive pins are not grounded or shorted to the shield or to each other CAUTI ON N Do not connect anything to the ground lug on the XLR connectors Do not connect or allow contact between the common cable shield and the fixture s chassis ground Grounding the common could cause a ground loop and or erratic behavior Setting up a Standard DMX Link To link one or more fixtures to a DMX controller 1 Connect the male XLR connector of a DMX Data cable to the controller s DMX Data Out connector 2 Connect the Data cable s female XLR connector to the Data In connector of the first or next fixture on the DMX link 3 Continue linking the remaining fixtures connecting a cable from the Data Out connector of each fixture to the Data In connector of the next fixture on the link 10 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Connect a male terminator to the Data Out connector of the last fixture in the link see Powering On the Fixture on page 12 For information on obtaining a terminator see Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 3 You can construct a terminator according to the specifications listed
189. ll other Keystone parameter DMX values 25 Keystone Top Right X DMX value 85 Keystone Top Right Y DMX value 85 92 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 10 Global Functions X Ratio The X Ratio Parameter shapes the output to adjust for keystone effects created in certain output situations This parameter adjusts the output by compressing or expanding the image horizontally Default DMX Value 128 50 no adjustment DMX value settings below the midpoint of the range compress the image horizontally from maximum compression at a value of 0 to no compression at a value of 128 DMX value settings above the midpoint of the range expand the image horizontally from no expansion at a value of 128 to maximum expansion at a value of 255 Original media file Y Ratio The Y Ratio parameter shapes the output to adjust for keystone effects created in certain output situations This parameter adjusts the output by compressing or expanding the image vertically Default DMX Value 128 50 no adjustment DMX value settings below the midpoint of the range compress the image vertically from maximum compression at a value of 0 to no compression at a value of 128 DMX value settings above the midpoint of the range expands the image vertically from no expansion at a value of 128 to maximum expansion at a value of 255 DL 2 User Manual 93 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Global Viewpoint Mode The Global Viewpoint Mode parameter de
190. ltidirectional navigation button currently selected screen Function will automatically reverse when fixture is inverted The LCD screen displays the menu arranged with a series of Menu Tabs along the left side for accessing configuration screens and options on the currently active screen Clicking on one of the Tab Select buttons selects the tab to the right of it on the screen The large Multi directional button controls movement between fields The Escape button to the left cancels a selection and the Enter button to the right selects and stores a selection DL 2 User Manual 19 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Functionality for each of these three buttons automatically reverses when the fixture is rotated to keep operation consistent You can also manually set this option see Display Options on page 28 The fields in the Active Screen display current configuration settings and uses drop down boxes numeric up down selectors and other user interface options to select in editable fields LCD Display Adjustment Buttons The four LCD Display Adjustment buttons next to the LCD screen control and provide visual adjustments for the menu display o Menu M Menu Select Start F o LCD Power LCD Display Power Button Channel The button nearest the green LED is the LCD display ID power button Holding it down for two seconds turns the Menu display on or off Use this in situations when you need to turn the
191. luminator 4 Inside the bezel locate the two Phillips head screws and washers securing the front window in place 5 Remove the screws making sure not to misplace the washers Clean the front window using a mild glass cleaner containing no ammonia and a soft lint free cotton cloth If the window needs replacement use the part specified in Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 3 Carefully replace the Phillips screws and washers making sure not to break the glass CAUTION Use plastic washers only when replacing the front glass Using metal washers can damage the glass Reconnect power to the infrared illuminator 10 Replace the front bezel Replacing Motor Driver Boards Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling WARNINGS AN Disconnect power before servicing The DL 2 fixture is designed with two motor driver boards 1 2 The board that controls the motors for the tilt focus zoom and iris functions as well as fans is located in the fixture head The board that drives pan motor and fans is located in the base housing All cabling is marked with labels corresponding to locations on board for easy replacement When changing a board align the screw holes and standoffs to ensure correct orientation in the fixture CAUTI ON The fixture will not func
192. m 0 128 9 subtracts green from 129 255 Exposure Control Mod1 adjusts color contrast 10 Mod2 adjusts color shift Invert B amp W Keep Color Mod1 black T comparison level Mod2 white comparison level Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Pl 12 Crossfade from original to source texture Reserved defaults to Off 13 255 146 Visual Mage Adjusts selected Visual Mode from O to maximum 0 255 0 100 0 0 Modifier 1 147 yaua mode Adjusts selected Visual Mode from O to maximum 0 255 0 100 0 0 Modifier 2 Off no effects selection 0 0 CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values 2 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values 3 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels 4 148 vica Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue T 0 0 em RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels 6 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR 8 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color 9 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 218 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 148 Effect Mode 1 Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Mod red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 10 Solarize if color value lt DM
193. media files still images DMX512 and Art Net support Remote software upgrade capability Royalty free stock digital art collection features over 1000 lighting optimized files RGBHV and S Video connections accept a wide range of media device inputs DL 2 User Manual 1 CHAPTER 1 Product Overview Graphics Engine Simultaneous playback of three discrete media streams on separate 2D 3D objects Image Optimizing Controls let you adjust both Black Level and Contrast for each cue and for each image 30 Object parameters give you graphic controls for each individual media stream including A choice of multiple play modes and play speeds The ability to define any segment of a video loop including Scrub capability Multiple color mixing and visual effects that can be combined any way you choose Variable Opacity to allow for crossfading or dissolves between media streams Full control of image Rotation Positioning and Scaling on X Y and Z axes Visual Modes that let you control black level and contrast to optimize content Video input or camera capture you can apply to 2d 3d objects 35 Global parameters provide graphic controls to the composite image created by up to 3 media streams Collage Generator combines output of the same file from multiple DL 2 fixtures into a smooth panorama array Intensity overlays the opacity control to provide system wide intensity level Overall image Color Mixing applied to composite media stream
194. ment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Glow Color Cycle Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 74 Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media texture on it You can apply this option to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it This parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without an associated texture Modifier 1 Defines the red color component speed A DMX value of 128 50 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a backward direction to 0 fastest change speed Modifier 2 Defines the green color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 Intensity Key Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 45 This option turns pixels of a selected intensity transparent or applies the reverse effect Modifier 1 Selects intensity from a DMX value of 0 no intensity to 255 100 full intensity Modifier 2 Selects intensity bandwidth from a DMX value of 0 n
195. monononononananarannnnnnnnnnnnncnracararararanananananananana 40 DMX Protocol OvervieW nmcccccncnnnononanononnnnnnnnrnranananananancncncararararananananananananasa 41 DL 2 User Manual xi Chapter 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content Each Graphic Object s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a media file This chapter outlines how to select an image s object and media file components as well as define the video segment and its playback Selecting Content oocccconncnonacnonacnnnncnorannnrncnnnnnnnrncnnnnnrnnrnrnnrnrnnnnrnnrnrnnrncnnanennans 43 How Contentiis Organized esee nex Rae ana nn NEN Rs 43 Selecting Content eO eere e dda eooboaee whos 43 Content Selection Parameters c momononononanannnnnnonannnnnnancncncncarararanacanananananananess 44 OD pH LM 44 Media Folder rias asada 45 Media Folder Descriptions errira hinn cece cence eee eee eee tenet 46 Media Files ii ED 47 Defining a Media File Segment sees nenne nenne nnn nna nnne nana an 47 In Frame and Out Frame Parameters sssssssssssee eee 47 Segment Selection Examples cece cee cece cece eee essen sees 48 Defining Playback omcmononcnonenonnncnnnncnnnncnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnanenos 48 Playback Mode dee ee RR T T RREARERE Pep ERANT RAE CE E XE dida ian 48 Playback Speed ee do 49 Chapter 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale You can independently control each Graphic Object s
196. mum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset Sinewave Vertical w Z axis Wobbulation object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 72 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the z axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset 120 DL 2 User Manual Texture Mixing Effect Mode parameter DMX value 51 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions M Object Effect Global Effect Texture Mixing lets you crossfade from textures media file content of one Graphic Object to the texture of another Graphic Object Modifier 1 Selects the Source file for the texture you want to pull A DMX value 1 selects Graphic Object 1 s media file content A DMX value 2 selects Graphic Object 2 s media file content A DMX value 3 selects Graphic Object 3 s media file content Modifier 2 Selects the effect level you want to use for the source file A DMX value 1 select s the first effect applied Modifier 3 Adjusts Graphic Object opacity of the source
197. n Effect Mode Parameters for both individual Graphic object and Global control Effect Mode Color Options cccoonoconnncnnnncnnnnncncnnnncnnrnnnnrncnnrnnnnrnnnnrannnrnnnnrnnannans 98 Alkor Nothing ro ii AA 98 BackgroundColor iii A AS EI pnt a 98 Background Color Cycle eret roots od leia le iste orones 98 Chromakey Coarse Inverse ssssssssssssssess sees heme sees nnns 99 CHromakey FINS sede a a ect tes 99 Chromakey MediUM i ree d 100 Chromakey Medium Inverse cece cece eee ene nena een nnne 100 CMY Add AIl Pixels cios eid eter iaa 101 CMY Add Non black Pixels ieina ion Eb ee eh tle ete eee DEDE E 101 Color DeConwverge x3 eee a d Ore v rt eee dd du d d eee v e e aides 102 Colorize Gray 5Calez erre eot ov DA ve Vecchi vl e RH ET 102 Edge Fade Colon cia te e ewer cues ER Rh ada de duds spe E EN Ea Res 103 clo eC 104 INTENSITY Key EE 104 Mask Color mimre on aa Tata 105 RGB Add All Pixels ettet raros Aaa dd 105 RGB Add2 All Pixels 1 1 cec der Le RR RERBA ER EUR YR RR EXE DURER EARARARRS 106 RGB Add to Non black PixelS comarca so 106 RGB Inverter DM 106 RGB Invert and Swap to BRG eU ied a reis 107 RGB Invert and Swap to GBR ssssssssssssssss ee eee hehehe eene nn 107 RGB Scal8 d io A A diosas 107 RGB Swap to BGR tii d 108 xiv DL 2 User Manual RGB S Wap to BRG ime sve vce ale fein Eur hal e ie Re ines FERA AANG 108 RGB Swap to GBR e etas a data 108 RGB Sw p to GR
198. n changed Fixture Hours Read only Fixture Hours Reset Pressing Reset restores fixture hours to 0 Fixture ID 1 255 Fixture Name Allows fixture name of up to 26 characters Graphics Processor Current Temperature Read only Graphics Processor Maximum Temperature Graphics Processor Minimum Temperature Read only Read only Graphics Processor Temperature Reset Pressing Reset restores value to Current Temperature Head Current Temperature Read only Head Maximum Temperature Read only Head Minimum Temperature Head Temperature Reset Read only Pressing Reset restores value to Current Temperature Home Iris Zoom Focus Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for Iris Zoom and Focus function Home Motion Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for all motion functions Home Pan Tilt Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for Pan and Tilt function Lamp Hours Read Only Lamp Hours Reset Pressing Reset restores Lamp hours to 0 Mainboard Current Temperature Read only Mainboard Maximum Temperature kedd only Mainboard Minimum Temperature Read only Mainboard Temperature Reset Pressing Reset restores value to Current Temperature Model Read only Pan Invert On Inverts pan positioning Off reverts to default position 154 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Ap
199. n provides options to reset shutdown and upgrade software Reboot Media Server restarts the fixture s internal graphics engine software Delete User Content removes all user content on the selected fixture s Upgrade Factory Content lets you reinstall factory content in a recovery situation Note A copy of the DL 2 Factory Content can be obtained only from High End Systems customer service DL 2 User Manual 33 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System 34 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 4 DMX Programming Basics If you are new to DMX programing this chapter will give you a brief overview and tips on programming DL 2 fixtures with Wholehog consoles from High End Systems DMX Programming Overvieui DMXSle Links A lighting console typically utilizes a protocol called DMX512 to communicate with automated lighting fixtures and conventional dimmers This protocol consists of 512 unique channels of control per output link universe Typically a lighting fixture or device will use a channel for each parameter s function Each channel consists of 256 values ranging from 0 to 255 The lighting console is programmed to transmit a corresponding DMX value for the desired function of each parameter All DMX values are stored within in the lighting console and typically are referred to as cues scenes or presets A lighting console locates a fixture on the link by it s DMX Start Channel Determining a DMX Start Channel The DMX Start
200. n the Continental United States Under no circumstances will freight collect shipments be accepted Prepaid shipping does not include rush expediting such as air freight Air freight can be sent customer collect in the continental United States REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED FOR UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER OTHER THAN THE LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE HIGH END SYSTEMS INC MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT AND HIGH END SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HIGH END SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE INCLUDING LOST PROFITS SUSTAINED OR INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT OR CAUSED BY PRODUCT DEFECTS OR THE PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF ANY PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE WAS FORESEEN OR UNFORESEEN Warranty is void if the product is misused damaged modified in any way or for unauthorized repairs or parts This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights specific to your locality Patents This product is protected by one or more patents including US 4 392 187 US 4 602 321 US 4 688 161 US 4 701 833 US 4 709 311 US 4 779 176 US 4 800 474 US 4 962 687 US 4 972 306 US 4 980 806 US 5 010 459 US 5 031 078 US 5 073 847 US 5 0
201. n the last frame 1 Pause 2 Play forward if opacity gt 0 hold on last frame 3 Play forward if opacity gt 0 looping continuously 4 Pause and rewind to In Frame 5 103 Play Mode Scrub Display the selected In Frame 6 NA 7 2 Scrub Display the selected Out Frame 7 Scrub Display the selected In Frame with 8 statistics Scrub Display the selected Out Frame with 9 statistics Reserved 10 255 3 100 204 DL 2 User Manual 104 105 106 107 Play Speed Sync Mode Sync To Visual Mode APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Normal Speed 0 0 Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 1 127 1 49 128 50 Normal Speed 128 50 Faster than Normal to Fastest 129 255 51 100 Graphic 2 Synchronization No selection 0 0 Synch to Graphic 1 movie time 1 Synch to Graphic 2 movie time 2 Synch to Graphic 3 movie time 3 Synch to Object rotation 1 4 Synch to Object rotation 2 5 Synch to Object rotation 3 6 Synch to reverse Object rotation 1 7 Synch to reverse Object rotation 2 8 NA 0 0 Synch to reverse Object rotation 3 9 Synch to Graphic movie time and rotation 1 10 Synch to Graphic movie time and rotation 2 11 Synche to Graphic movie time and rotation 3 12 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 1 13 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 14 Synch to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 3 15 Reserved Defaults to mode 0 no selection 16 25
202. ncreases object size along Z axis from actual to maximum size 1 127 1 49 129 254 51 99 Maximum object size along Z axis 10 1 255 100 214 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Graphic 2 Position Moves object left from center of display 0 36767 0 49 127 R esa X Position Centers object along X axis in display 32768 50 128 z 36769 Moves object right from center of display 65535 Moves object down from center of display 0 36767 0 49 129 F ne Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768 50 32768 50 130 a 36769 Moves object up from center of display 65535 51 100 Moves object nearer from center of display 0 36767 0 49 131 EY Z Position Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 50 32768 50 132 Moves object back along Z axis at center of 36769 51 100 display 65535 DL 2 User Manual 215 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Graphic 3 Function Standard Protocol Opacity o transparency level from completely ransparent 0 to opaque 255 Graphic 3 Content Definition No selection 0 0 First Stock 3 D Object flat plane 1 1 134 m Object Additional Stock 3 D Objects 2 149 0014 First User 3 D Objects 150 NA Additional User Objects 151 255 No selection 0 HES Folder 1 1 HES folder 2 40 2 40 135 Media Folder First User folder
203. nd Single Protocol for DL 2 fixtures Motion and Camera Control Standard Dual Single Protocol Movement Functions Pan Course Moves projector head from 0 to 400 a 0 100 32768 50 Pan Fine ii 2222 Tilt Course y A s 0 Tilt Fine Moves projector head from 0 to 240 65535 0 100 32768 50 Adjusts the mechanical iris located in front of the projector output lens from closed to open Adjusts focus from near to far Adjusts zoom from narrow to wide See Appendix B for conversion tables Reserved for future use Safe Dimmer 0 255 0 100 0 0 Focus Zoom MSpeed Macro ioj o oO A N Pan and Tilt MSpeed off 10 13 Reserved 14 19 Menu Display Off 5 To prevent inadvert 20 28 Reserved 29 ent triggering some Menu Display Dim 5 30 38 Reserved functions won t 39 Menu Display Bright 5 activate until the 40 48 Control Reserved value has been held 49 10 Function Preview for a period of time 50 58 0 0 Reserved 59 e NA Home All 20 A number in 60 68 Reserved parenthesis is the 69 79 Lamp 0 minimum number 90 88 Reserved f tive ti 89 Lamp OFF 80 of consecutive times 50 og Reserved a DMX value must 99 119 Shutdown 80 be received froma 120 130 Reserved controller before 181 144 Graphics System Reset 80 the operation starts 145 1
204. nd select Media Speed Default On to revert to the default speed setting DMX 128 Then if you touch the encoder again the previous play speed will be recalled Mask Strobe A unique function of the Wholehog 3 library system allows the creation of a special encoder type Flying Pig Systems has created a parameter called mask strobe in the Global fixture type When this is adjusted it will automatically change the DMX value of the mask select channel to the appropriate value and adjust the DMX channel for the strobe speed This will override the Mask Edge parameter as per the DL2 DMX Protocol Play Modes Opacity Using the Graphic fixture type press the Mode button to view the play mode options By default all modes trigger normally If available per the DL2 DMX protocol you can select Media Trigger Opacity to change to the Play Modes that trigger when Opacity is greater than zero To restore to normal triggering select Media Trigger Normal CMY The Global and Graphic fixture types both contain CMY controls for the Effect Mode modifier channels The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well For some effect options the CMY parameters will not adjust color but will adjust the effect per the DL 2 DMX protocol You can find a description of CMY controls functionality for each effect option in Chapter 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions on page 97 Control Channel Functions Many of the control channel funct
205. nes the blue color component from 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation DL 2 User Manual 99 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Chromakey Fine Inverse Y Object Effect W Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 29 A chromakey removes a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values The Inverse Chromakey Fine parameter selects a color range 15 either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as a chromakey Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from 0 no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Chromakey Medium Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 27 A chromakey removes a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values The Chromakey Medium parameter selects a color range 25 either side of the defined value Modifier 1 Defines the red color compon
206. newave Circular with z axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 67 Sinewave Horizontal with x axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 68 Sinewave Horizontal with y axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 69 Sinewave Horizontal with z axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 76 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects DMX Effect Mode Adjustments Value Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier2 Modifier 3 70 Sinewave Vertical with x axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 71 Sinewave Vertical with y axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 72 Sinewave Vertical with z axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 73 Glow applies glow effect to 3 D object Red Green Blue 74 Glow Color Cycle Red cycle Green cycle Blue cycle speed speed speed DL 2 User Manual 7 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects 78 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content After designating a master fixture with the Sync To parameter you can synchronize the content of other fixtures to any Object on the master in terms of playback time rotation or both Synchronization Parameters Sync Mode The Sync Mode parameter defines the type of synchronization between Graphic Objects You can synchronize to the frame of the movie the 3 D object rotation either forward or reverse or both In DL 2 software Synchro
207. ng stehend e Blau Neutral e Gr n Gelb Erde Vor dem Austauschen von Lampen oder vor Wartungsarbeiten stets den Netzstecker ziehen 3 Diese Ger te sind nur zum Einbau in trockenen Lagen bestimmt und m ssen vor Regen und Feuchtigkeit gesch tzt werden 4 Servicearbeiten sollten nur von Fachpersonal ausgef hrt werden Das Gerat enthalt keine wartungsbed rftigen Teile 5 Dieses Ger t geh rt zur Klasse Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden DL 2 User Manual 239 APPENDIX E Safety Information Ap ndice Informaci n Importante De Seguridad Advertencia Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios 1 Este equipo debe conectarse a un circuito que tenga una protecci n m xima contra una sobrecargas de 20 A Advertencia Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocuciones 1 Si se recibi este equipo sin el conector de alimentacion monte usted el conector correcto seg n ia clave siguente moreno vivo azul neutral verde amarillo tierra Desconecte el suministro de energ a antes de cambiar l mparas o prestar servicio de reparaci n Este equipo esta disenado para usarce en lugares secos no lo exponga a la lluvia o humedad Derive el servicio de reparaci n de este equipo al personal calificado El interior no contiene repuestos que puedan ser reparados por el usuario Equipo de Clase Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra 240 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX E Safety Information
208. ng the camera shutter options The Camera Shutter parameter controls the camera shutter providing six steps of frame rate control from 1 to 30 frames second DMX values 0 63 set Full Auto Exposure and is the suggested default option White Balance Mode The White Balance Mode parameter adjusts for variation in what is perceived as White in different light conditions The Auto White Balance mode computes the white balance value output using color information from the entire image It outputs the proper value using the color temperature on a range of values from 3000 to 7500K and is the suggested default setting Other settings for this parameter accommodate Indoor and Outdoor lighting conditions Orientation The Camera Orientation parameter can Vertically Invert Flip or Horizontally Invert Mirror the camera s image being viewed by the camera All four combinations of Vertical and Horizontal Invert are available Camera Effects The Camera Effects parameter provides several options for manipulating the camera s image This parameter provides the ability to convert the camera s image to black and white B amp W or invert the color Negative art A snapshot can also be taken of the camera s image Freeze Frame with or without one of these effects applied 134 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 14 Content Management Application CMA A Content Management Application CMA running on your workstation or laptop computer gives you remote co
209. nization is not Slaving Slaving would mean that the master s DMX values for the synchronized function s would override replace the slave DMX values The master in this case The appropriate DMX channels for all the synced fixtures and the master fixture must be set to the same values for the synchronized functions to stay in sync When using the Sync Mode parameter keep the following in mind Any Sync Mode value above 15 16 255 defaults back to 0 Any settings affected by the synchronize mode you select need to be mirrored on both objects to synch correctly Setting an object to sync to itself will have no effect Playback Timing Synchronizing playback sets all applicable fixtures to a master clock so that all fixtures have a definite synchronized starting point when playing back their sequences or loops The master fixture determines the sequence length for all the other fixtures in the link regardless of the number of programmed scenes or the sequence length of the individual fixtures synchronizing to the master When the master fixture reaches the end of the selected media file segment all fixtures will restart at In Frame point of their media file segment regardless of whether the playback has come to the selected Out Frame and all the clocks will be reset to zero For example if a synchronizing fixture s media segment has a shorter sequence length than the master fixture s media file segme
210. nnnnonannncnnnorannnrnnnnrnnnnnnncnnnnrnnrnrnnrnrnnrncnnrnrananennas 149 Verifying Software Versions sess senes essen 149 Upgrading the CMA Software sssssssssssssssees ehe heme nene 150 Upgrading DL 2 Fixture Software sssssssssssssssses eme semen enn 150 Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration esee 151 Viewing Fixture Configuration Values sssssssssm menn 152 Editing Configuration Values ssssssssssssse m e memes nennen 152 Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes information on replacing parts cleaning the fixture and some basic troubleshooting procedures Pan and Tilt Locking oocoonononnnnnnnacacacacacaracacanananancacacacananananananananananinanannnes 157 Maintaining the Filtering System ooccoonccnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnancnnnncnnnnennnnarannnnaos 158 Filter Warnings essen a add 158 Cleaning and Replacing Filters ssssessssssss mmm menm 158 Cleaning the Base Housing Filter 0 cece cece cece e eens me 159 Replacing the Fixture Filter ccee cece cece eee eee eee meme hene 159 Cleaning the Internal Projector Filter sessssssssss eee conan nan 160 Replacing the Lamp ocooncccncnonnnnnnacnnrncnnrncnnrnnnnrnnnncnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnennanennas 161 Replacing the Fuse occcconcncncnonannonannnrncnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnanrnnnnrananennas 162 Cleaning or Re
211. no adjustment Tip All the factory content provided has been optimized already This parameter is especially useful for optimizing user content or camera capture Invert Black and White Keep Color Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 11 This option allows you to invert the black and white components of an image while leaving other colors unaffecting You can vary the threshold for the black in a pixel required for inversion Modifier 1 Adjusts the comparison level of black for inversion from a DMX value of 0 inverting only absolute black to 255 100 converting more of the image from black to white Modifier 1 Adjusts the comparison level of white for inversion from a DMX value of 0 inverting only absolute white to 255 100 converting more of the image from white to black Texture Mixing Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 12 Texture Mixing lets you crossfade from textures media file content of one Graphic Object to the texture of another Graphic Object Any effects applied to the Source file do not display Modifier 1 Selects the Source file for the texture you want to pull A DMX value 1 selects Graphic Object 1 s media file content A DMX value 2 selects Graphic Object 2 s media file content A DMX value 3 selects Graphic Object 3 s media file content Modifier 3 Adjusts Graphic Object opacity of the source texture from a DMX value of 0 fully transparent to 255 100 fully opaque DL 2 User M
212. nputs About 10 seconds are required for an input change to take effect However you might have selected an invalid input using projector controls Try setting the projector back its defaults see Reset Screen on page 33 Or use DMX to exit the projector menu system see Projector Control on Make sure a video input is physically attached to the input you selected and that the video feed is active 168 DL 2 User Manual Image is blurry out of focus or colors are unnatural Problem Solution CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Check the Fixture filters see page 159 Is the DL 2 mounted less than 1 4 meters to an object If so move the DL 2 farther away to enable it to focus properly Make sure the DL 2 is not operating near fog machines hazers or mineral oil hazers see Fog Machine Warning on page 8 Clean the front window see Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window on page 162 Check the lamp see the projector manual shipped with the DL 2 f you re using the projector s on screen programming system you can override zoom and focus using the menu system see Projector Control on page 129 The LCD Menu display is off Fixture behaves erratically or won t respond to DMX control If the Blue LED is off the Computer isn t receiving power Press and hold the Top and Bottom Tab select buttons to restart computer see Menu Panel Components on page 19 If the screen i
213. ns where you are projecting from any angle other than perpendicular to the surface you can use the Modifier 3 parameter to adjust the image s horizontal center A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward 0 moves the horizontal center toward the left edge of the image Values above the midrange move the horizontal center right toward the edge of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 dge Detect Black and White M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 21 This option displays only the edges of image components Edges appear white everything else is black Modifier 1 Adjusts horizontal edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts vertical edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Adjusts comparison edge threshold from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment dge Detect Color Y Object Effect W Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 20 This option displays only the edges of image components with their color values Modifier 1 Adjusts horizontal edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts vertical edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Adjusts comparison edge threshold from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment DL 2 User Manual 115 CHAPTER 11 E
214. nstruction Super HAD CCD sensor technology Lens 18x Optical Zoom Horizontal view angle 48 2 8 Auto focus Range 29mm 800mm Picture Elements 380K pixels 768 H x 582 V Minimum working distance 29mm WIDE end 800mm TELE end Environmental Specifications Maximum ambient temperature Ta 35 C 95 F 234 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX D DL 2 Specifications Cable and Connector Specifications Video Connectors RGBHV BNC x 5 VGA DB15 S Video mini DIN Peripheral Netuiork Connectors 2 USB ports DMX and RS 485 Projector Link Cables Belden 9841 or equivalent meets specifications for EIA RS 485 applications with the following characteristics Two 4 conductor twisted pairs plus a shield Maximum capacitance between conductors 30 pF ft Maximum capacitance between conductor and shield 55 pF ft Maximum resistance 20 Ohm 100 ft Nominal impedance 100 140 Ohm Grounding lug inside XLR shell Common cable shield positive Common negative data true data true cable shield data negative negati gative complement data complement data o positive complement positive data true data true complement Male XLR Connector Female XLR Connector This data line is not used by the fixture but allows data to pass through the fixture Connectors Two 5 pin male and female XLR connectors e Pin 1 Ground Pin 2 Data Pin 3 Data e Pin 4 Secondary dat
215. nt it continuously repeats its sequence until the master fixture resets all the clocks If a synchronizing fixture s media segment has a longer sequence length it restarts at the In Frame point before completing its entire sequence DL 2 User Manual 79 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content DMX Default Value 0 no sync type selection ie Option 0 No selection 1 Synchronize to Graphic Object 1 movie time 2 Synchronize to Graphic Object 2 movie time 3 Synchronize to Graphic Object 3 movie time 4 Synchronize to 3 D object rotation 1 5 Synchronize to 3 D object rotation 2 6 Synchronize to 3 D object rotation 3 7 Synchronize to reverse 3 D object rotation 1 8 Synchronize to reverse 3 D object rotation 2 9 Synchronize to reverse 3 D object rotation 3 10 Synchronize to Graphic Object 1 movie time and rotation 1 11 Synchronize to Graphic Object 2 movie time and rotation 2 12 Synchronize to Graphic Object 3 movie time and rotation 3 13 Synchronize to Graphic Object 1 movie time and reverse rotation 1 14 Synchronize to Graphic Object 2 movie time and reverse rotation 2 15 Synchronize to Graphic Object 3 movie time and reverse rotation 3 Sync To The Sync To parameter allows you to synchronize multiple DL 2 servers with one DL 2 server as long as they are all on one network The default applies to every server on the network Default DMX Value 0 No synchron
216. ntacting High End Systems Customer Support For a partial system restore you will also need External USB CD drive USB keyboard Optional components for system restore USB mouse which may require the addition of a USB hub DL 2 User Manual 171 CHAPTER 16 Restoring the System Full System Restore A full system restore will replace the entire contents of the DL 2 hard drive including Microsoft Windows Embedded Operating System DL 2 application DL 2 settings DL 2 Stock content This type of restore should be used when you are trying to restore the fixture to factory state Note After a full system restore all user content will be absent You will need to re transfer it to your fixture through the DL 2 CMA Also a full restore requires a USB DVD drive and takes between 45 90 minutes longer to perform than a partial restore depending on the speed of your USB DVD drive Partial System Restore Preserving Content A partial system restore will replace the following components Microsoft Windows Embedded Operating System DL 2 application The partial restore does not replace the DL 2 settings the DL 2 Stock content or User content As such the partial system restore option exists as a convenience for users who are trying to restore their fixture s OS and application but who need to preserve the content or settings on the DL 2 fixture This type of restore also takes less time than a full restore N
217. nternacionales Las modificaciones al producto podr an afectar la seguridad y dejar al producto fuera de conformidad con las normas de seguridad relevantes FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Important Safetu Information Instructions pertaining to continued protection against fire electric shock and injury to persons are found in Appendix E Please read all instructions prior to assembling mounting and operating this equipment Important Informations De S curit Les instructions se rapportant la protection permanente contre les incendies l lectrocution excessif et aux blessures corporelles se trouvent dans l Annexe E Veuillez lire toutes les instructions avant d assembler de monter ou d utiliser cet quipement Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Sicherheitsanleitungen zum Schutz gegen Feuer elektris
218. ntrol of uploading and crossloading content upgrading software and fixture configuration for multiple DL 2 fixtures on a fixture network Overvieui Before you launch the CMA set up your Ethernet network and link all DL 2 fixtures you want to access from the CMA See Linking DL 2 Fixtures on page 10 for more information on configuring a fixture network The CMA communicates with the DL 2 fixture network in three ways Web Services The CMA application physically runs on an end user s machine but accesses web services to facilitate all aspects of the required CMA functionality Discovery Packets The CMA captures the DL 2 fixture discovery packets to automatically discover the IP Addresses and Fixture IDs of all the DL 2 fixtures on the network SMB File Transfers The cross platform SMB file transfer protocol is used to transfer both Content and upgrade installer files between the CMA and the DL 2 fixture Installing the CMA You can download the latest version of the application for Windows XP or Mac OS 10 4 based system from the Digital Lighting support section of the High End Systems website www highend com support A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal computer The following are recommended hardware requirements for the CMA Mac OS 10 4 or Windows XP with Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Service Pack 1 100 1000 base Ethernet card a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for fast content uploading of large files
219. o 18 inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green 222 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 152 Effect Mode 2 Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 20 Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 21 Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 22 23 24 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 25 Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 26 Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 27 Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 28 Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 29 Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 30 Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 31 Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved
220. o Glass 41 E 003 Max Psych mv2 m2v m2v 4 amp 060KB 2 2 2005 8 0 Q aes si E 004 Ripple Melt 3 mv2 m2v mv 5 8 146KB 2 2 2005 amp 0 A E 005 Square Hypno mv2 m2v m2v 6 1 629KB 2 2 2005 8 0 Beacon 44 Note Clicking on a column heading sorts the table according to the values in that column DL 2 User Manual 139 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA Viewing Folders Each Stock or User Media folder contains a group of media files Name of the Media File collection This value is editable for User content See Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 141 DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder This value can be auto assigned and edited for User content See Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 141 File Count of files in this collection Date the folder was last modified Vieuiing Files Selecting the actual media folder reveals its contents Name of the file This value is editable for User content See Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 141 Type indicates the file format extension DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder This value can be auto assigned and edited for User content See Assigning DMX Values to User Content on page 141 Size of file in kilobytes Date the file was last modified You can access several options for displaying files in the right pane through the drop down menu or by rig
221. o cycle a color sequence on the background controlling the transition speed Modifier 1 Defines the red color component speed A DMX value of 128 50 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 10096 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a backward direction to 0 fastest change speed Modifier 2 Defines the green color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 98 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Chromakey Coarse Y Object Effect Y Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 28 A chromakey removes a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values The Chromakey Coarse parameter selects a color range 40 either side of the defined value Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from DMX values of 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from DMX values of 0 no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from DMX values of 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Chromakey Coarse Inverse
222. obbulation sse 119 Sinewave Vertical w X axis Wobbulation sess 120 Sinewave Vertical w Y axis Wobbulation sss 120 Sinewave Vertical w Z axis Wobbulation sess 120 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular sssssssess mm 122 Texture Ripple Horizontal sssessssssssssssss eme m sense eese 123 Texture Ripple Vertical 2 0 0 a A e ee ene mnes esses sensn 123 EHI EA 124 Transparent WIDes Neural ete at 125 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 12 Fixture Motion Functions This chapter describes mechanical control for the DL 2 fixture with it s internal projector Pan and Tilt REP 127 DiMMe EMEEEE 127 FOCUS M 127 ZOOM eEe 127 MSpeed Motor Speed occccccocncconncnonncnnnncnononcnnnncnnnnennnncnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrananennas 128 Control Function Options ocmcncnnnonononnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnananancncarararararananananancarananas 128 Fixture Operations mico ee E He E RA REREEVENRE E NO E Ve RE RERR ERE EE 128 Projector Control einer RA eee tne Pur eb vet ee v e er penne r e s Madina Vs 129 Control Parameter Projector Options ssssssssssss mmn 129 Using the Internal Projector s Menu ssssssssss meme 130 Chapter 13 Live Video Input and Control The DL 2 graphics engine can receive video fr
223. od3 not used 40 RGB Swap to BGR 41 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls 1 transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate 220 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Moa3 sets overall color range Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 48 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 63 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wo
224. odifier 2 No change to green color component Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 red RGB Suiap to BRG M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 8 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become blue all green values become red and all blue values become green Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to red from 0 no color change to 255 100 red Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green RGB Swap to GBR Y Object Effect Y Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 7 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become green all green values become blue and all blue values become red Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to red from 0 no color change to 255 100 red 108 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Suiap to GRB Y Object Effect Y Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 43 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become green and all green values become blue
225. om an external source or its own integrated digital video camera equipped with an infared illuminator to provide a direct digital video feed option Live Video Sources momocnononnnnonannnrannnrncnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnennrnennnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnanennas 131 Internal Camera 253 ote vec Opec os 131 Other Video SOUFTCes erste eve ecu verte e RR ar RECO Cree ee vem Ve RR REA 131 Live Video Connection Options ocmoconcnonocannncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnnrancnnrananranananos 132 Configuring the Video Input Source cmonccnonncnonacononncannncnnnnrnnnnrananrnnnnnnananans 132 Sending the Camera Feed to Camera Out eee 133 Controlling the Internal Camera Input eeeeeeee nennen enne 133 Camera ZOOM qa ety vsu ape te erre edet evo ve De e Re exe v de UR Ee pea vend Yo 133 C mera FOCUS PET 133 ROTE ACO defi voter eee ev Bre ie vedanta een nee ee ER Gon Aan cents 133 Camera Shutter 235i tete regen adidas 134 White Balance Mode ceri ai 134 Orientation s i soie A A Ie meae anal 134 Camera Effects isis cet est ec rere isa Ma ie e Up RENE HERRERA BERE 134 xvi DL 2 User Manual Chapter 14 Content Management Application CMA A Content Management Application CMA running on your workstation or laptop computer gives you remote control of uploading and crossloading content upgrading software and fixture configuration for multiple DL 2 fixtures on a fixture network jug
226. om the fixtures to the CMA Ethernet Cat 5 limit is 100 meters For longer distances use a router that takes fiber input to Cat 5 output as for typical Ethernet distribution What is the longest length High End Systems has tested for camera video distribution High End has tested up to 1000 feet of quality Cat 5 without noticing degradation of signal Does DL 2 support the file format MPEG 4 MPEG 4 is not currently supported Convert original graphics and video to MPEG 2 170 DL 2 User Manual Chapter l6 Restoring the System There are two types of system restore that you can perform on the DL 2 with your DL 2 System Restore CD a full system restore or a partial system restore A Full System restore should only be done in the event of complete drive failure Caution Contact High End Systems Support http www highend com PRI OR to initiating a Full Restore A partial restore can be done to replace the O S partition of the drive but should only be done as part of a specified upgrade plan In that case the XPe image the fixture shipped with will need to be updated All system restore operations require the DL 2 System Restore CD that ships with each DL 2 fixture If you have misplaced or damaged this CD you may contact High End Systems http www highend com for a replacement For a full system restore you will also need External USB DVD drive USB keyboard DL 2 Stock content obtained by co
227. onfirm to begin a Full System Restore Confirm mene X 7 Allow the restore to run This will take between 10 30 minutes depending on the speed of your USB drive Status will be displayed throughout the restore EX CAWINDOWS system32Xcmd exe E Microsoft DiskPart version 5 1 3565 Copyright lt C gt 1999 2003 Microsoft Corporation On computer IMAGE BUILDER 8 When this part of the restore is completed the DL 2 will automatically restart 174 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 16 Restoring the System 9 Allow the device a few minutes to perform some OS initialization and reboot once more The following steps are additional steps for a full system restore only 10 If you are performing a full system restore you now need to re load the DL 2 Stock content Remove your DL 2 System Restore CD and insert the first DL 2 Stock content DVD 11 Navigate in the DL 2 menu to the Rst tab Select the Upgrade Content button You will see the filenames scroll by as the content is copied to the fixture Wait until you see the Upgrade Successful message 12 Repeat steps 9 10 for each additional Stock content DVD 13 Once the upgrade is complete you may remove all your external USB devices NOTE P re rts t et em Restore Return to Main Menu DL 2 User Manual 175 CHAPTER 16 Restoring the System 176 DL 2 User Manual Appendix A DL 2 DMX Protocol This table describes the Standard Dual a
228. oosen the 2 phillips head screws to remove the tool and use itto Loosen screws to grasp and lift the two air filters from the internal projector remove tool 6 Clean air filter with compresses air a brush or wash out dust and particles with mild soap and water 7 If the filter damaged replace it only with the part listed in Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 3 8 Replace completely dry filters in slot The filters are keyed for positioning Make sure that both filters are fully inserted Replacing the Lamp WARNI NG AN Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Do not attempt to hot restrike the lamp Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes before you open the lamp cover The inside of the projector can become very hot For continued safety replace with a lamp assembly of the same type Do not drop the lamp module or touch the glass bulb The glass can shatter and cause injury Shut down the fixture and disconnect from power Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes Unlatch and remove the back bezel BR WN Rp Loosen the two phillips head screws and open the lamp cover 5 Loosen the two phillips head screws grasping the handle and pull out the lamp assembly Lamp cover screws 6 Replace the lamp assembly see Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 3 7 Seat the assembly and tighten the two lamp assembly screws 8 Clos
229. ote Because this method does not completely erase the DL 2 hard drive it also does not return the device to a factory state To guarantee a complete return to a factory state you must perform a full system restore 172 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 16 Restoring the System Performing the System Restore Follow steps 1 8 for a partial system restore Continue through step 12 for a full system restore 1 Position your fixture so that you can view the DL 2 menu on the LCD display 2 Plug your USB CD or DVD drive keyboard and mouse optional into one of the external USB ports on the DL 2 If necessary you may need to use a USB hub although this should only be a requirement if you wish to use a mouse 3 Power on or reboot the DL 2 When you see Hit any key to boot from CD press a key on your keyboard 4 Allow the System Restore menu to load Depending on the speed of your USB drive it will take between 3 5 minutes load During this time a number of small windows will appear and disappear Wait until you see a full screen menu titled DL 2 System Restore Menu DL2 System Restore Menu Partial Restore Preserving Content Exit 5 Using the lt Tab gt key on your keyboard or using your mouse select the type of restore you wish to perform DL 2 User Manual 178 CHAPTER 16 Restoring the System 6 The next page will ask you to confirm your selection Press Confirm and the restore will begin Click C
230. ou viii DL 2 User Manual Table of Contents Contacting High End Systems sssssssssssses e emnes ii Declaration of Conformiby 2 seco eene decia id aia iii Product Modification Warning csssssssee HH memes iv FEC AAPOFMALION ec Em iv Important Safety Information cionado iv SVMDGIS fics E V Fog Machine Warning sitiar iii V Packaged Media NOTICE 5 erroe rete e a ee po Once en e exa Sx TRU ONE KT ESI v Warranty Information sein a a a aa a Dove RS v Patents rU UE vi What You Should Know About Copyright sss vii Chapter 1 Product Overview This chapter describes the features and specifications of the DL 2 fixture and the Content Management Application software Features 1 EMILE M EE 1 Graphics ENGINE eicere eerte rd d itia e cn o RU Rr rn aln M Rc 2 Content Management Application sss Hmmm 2 EOWA NEED IIT 2 Related Products and Optional Accessories eese nnns 3 Chapter 2 Setup and Configuration Hardware setup includes mounting connecting to power and Ethernet and DMX linking Software setup includes launching the Content Management Application CMA and configuration options Hardware Setup e cccoonocnonncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnrnnrnrnnrncnnrnrnnrncanans 5 Unpacking thetFixture unico xe need idee ind eee iaa Da de ERE wat der e ie 5 Pan and Tilt LOCKING ertet rnt A dd e d 5 Attaching a Power
231. ower to the fixture before performing certain procedures discussed in this manual Homing the Fixture When the DL 2 fixture is connected to an appropriately rated power source it automatically begins a homing procedure to verify that the major functions of the fixture and its internal projector are oriented properly Shortcut Holding down the inner most i e middle two menu tab buttons for more than two seconds will home the unit 12 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Viewing the Display Panel The DL 2 display panel gives access to the fixture s onboard menu system Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System describes the menu system configuration options in detail Note Most configuration features are also available through the Content Management Application CMA see Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 152 DL 2 User Manual 13 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Software Setup Verifying and Uploading Fixture Software The latest fixture software is always available at the High End Systems website www highend com support You can view the fixture s currently installed software version under the I nfo tab of the fixture s menu system see Info Version Screen on page 32 or through the CMA s All Servers view see Verifying Software Versions on page 149 To upgrade the fixture software first download the file from the website to your computer Then use the CMA to upload it to your DL 2 fixtur
232. pe variation 4 9 Triangles variation 1 10 Triangles variation 2 11 Rectangular wrap 12 Tiles closing in 13 Horizontal doors closing 14 Horizontal doors closing from opposing sides 15 DL 2 User Manual 187 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Vertical doors closing from outside in 16 Vertical wipe closing from inside out 17 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 1 18 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 2 19 Vertical panels closing from outside in 1 20 Vertical panels closing from outside in 2 21 Vertical diamonds 1 22 Vertical diamonds 2 23 Horizontal diamonds 1 24 Horizontal diamonds 2 25 Pinwheel 26 Oval Iris closing from outside in 27 Oval Iris closing from inside out 28 Oscillating iris closing from outside in 29 Artistic Iris 30 Reserved for other installed masks defaults to 0 31 127 Periodic strobe round iris mask closing from 128 outside in 31 Mask Select Round iris closing from inside out 129 NA 0 0 Rectangle closing from outside in 130 Rectangle closing from inside out 131 Checkerboard variation 1 132 Checkerboard variation 2 133 Radial wipe variation 1 134 Radial wipe variation 2 135 Radial wipe variation 3 136 Radial wipe variation 4 137 Triangles variation 1 138 Triangles variation 2 139 Rectangular wrap 140 Tiles closing in 141 Horizontal doors clo
233. placing the Front Window eere nennen nennen 162 Replacing Motor Driver Boards oomoococcoonoconnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnnrancnnrncnnrannnnaos 163 Fixture Head Driver Board ern nete EE aa 164 Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board sssssssssse mee 164 Troubleshooting esee nu nena nnn uasa ananas ananas usada dus u nun 165 Button Shortcut Commands eoi Aaa pea 165 Status Message Menu Display ssssssssss mmm emen essen 165 Button ACtOn iii in do eere unte oed sva esa lr eu d dnos ns Cd a ein a d 166 Inactivity TIMED eee 166 Supported Error Warning Messages 6 cee cece eee e eee e mem eem 166 System State LEDS eere rte ganar aves E cree erre ni o els nas 167 Board LED States iiien oo m 168 General Troubleshooting Suggestions ccc cece eect eee emnes 168 Frequently Asked Questions cc eee eee eect eee eee eese 170 Chapter 16 Restoring the System There are two types of system restore that you can perform on the DL 2 with your DL 2 System Restore CD a full system restore or a partial system restore Full System Restore c mcmonocncnonocnonannnrannnrnnnnranennnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnnrnnrnrnncnarananeass 172 Partial System Restore Preserving Content eere nennen 172 Performing the System Restore momoconcnonoconnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncrncnnrnnnnrnnnnanos 173 xviii DL 2 User Manual Appendix A DL 2 DMX Protocol
234. plication CMA Configuration Item Configuration Value Options Pan Tilt Swap On swaps pan and tilt positioning Off reverts to default positioning Projector Control Menu On access the Projector menu Off reverts to DL 2 menu Projector Defaults Selecting this option automatically restores projector defaults Projector Focus Value 0 255 Projector Input External accepts input from an external video source Internal accepts input from the graphics engine Projector Input Selection by DMX Yes allows projector input to be switched via DMX No disables projector input switching via DMX Projector Startup Mode Always Onturns lamp on when the fixture is plugged in Manual turns lamp on only if the Lamp is set to On DMX turns lamp on if DMX is present Projector Lamp On On Off Projector Zoom Value 0 255 Upgrade Content Restore Settings Press Upgrade to upgrade stock content Press Restore to revert to factory fixture settings Self Test Focus On tests focus mechanical functionality Off stops self test Self Test Iris On tests Iris mechanical functionality Off stops self test Self Test Pan Tilt On tests Pan and Tilt mechanical functionality Off stops self test Self Test Video Pattern Select from a list of Patterns to test graphics engine functionality Self Test Zoom On tests Zoom mechanical functionality Off stops self test Reboot Press Reboo
235. point graphic 2 10 NA Look at point graphic 3 11 Reserved 12 255 49 Maximum horizontal angle clockwise 0 0 Viewpoint Genter 32768 50 32768 50 50 Position X Maximum horizontal angle counterclockwise 65535 100 51 Maximum Vertical angle clockwise 0 0 Viewpoint Genter 32768 50 32768 50 52 Position Y Maximum Vertical angle counterclockwise 65535 100 Maximum distance from origin in front of view 0 0 53 Viewpoint target Position Z Center 32768 50 30260 49 54 Zoom Maximum distance from origin behind view target 65535 100 No control selected Safe 0 0 Reserved 1 252 Four in one displays each layers output and 253 55 ad combined output in a 2 x 2 array 0 0 ontro Reserved 254 NA On screen Statistics 255 Reserved 4 255 190 DL 2 User Manual 56 Global Control Modifer Displays the selected media file for each graphic Text color gray object plus the final composite image 0 9 Displays the selected media file for each graphic object plus the final composite image and the 10 19 image s position in an applied collage effect Displays the current media file for each graphic object plus the final composite image with the f 20 30 result of an applied collage effect and curved surface adjustment Displays the media file for each graphic object 31 plus the first effect applied to it if any Displays the media file for each graphic object 32 with up to two effects applied to
236. projection from behind a Rear screen Off Settings do not match factory defaults File Displays content file locations and allows a content preview see page 33 DL 2 User Manual 23 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Main Sub Tabs Fields Tab Screens Controls Options Function Notes Displays fixture base housing s current minimum Box Reset and maximum temperature Pressing Reset reverts Tem all settings to the current temperature P Displays current minimum and maximum Head Reset temperature of fixture head Pressing Reset reverts all settings to the current fixture head temperature Software Version Firmware Version Windows XPe Displays currently installed versions Varsion Pan Encoder Version Info Tilt Encoder Version Unique ID Displays Internal ID IP Address Displays fixture s IP address Fixture Name Displays a currently assigned Fixture Name Lamp Hours p Monitors lamp fixture and filter hours of operation Hours Fixture Reset Selecting Reset reverts hours to 0 Hours Motion Shutdown NE Displays system activity and errors For more Projector Status Status information see Chapter 15 Maintenance and Lamp Status Troubleshooting on page 157 Projector Air Filter Motion All Resets all mechanical functions to default positions Motion P a i md an Resets Pan and Tilt functions to de
237. r DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 39 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue i RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero 44 intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mode Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Controls transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Effect Mod3 sets overall color range 76 m NA 0 o Mode 2 Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 48 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 50 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 63 Sinewave Circular with Y
238. r of a wipe effect s separation Modifier 3 Selects the wipe option Each option occupies a portion of the DMX value range DL 2 User Manual 125 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions 126 DL 2 User Manual Chapter le Fixture Motion Functions This chapter describes mechanical control for the DL 2 fixture with it s internal projector Pan and Tilt The DL 2 fixture has a 400 pan range and a 240 tilt range Two DMX channels for Pan and two for Tilt provide 16 bit position adjustment to a fraction of a degree MSpeed values can control the timing of pan and tilt motion for DL 2 fixtures see MSpeed Motor Speed on page 128 To control Pan and Tilt movement timing via a DMX controller crossfading leave the Pan Tilt MSpeed in it s default Off setting Note The DL 2 fixture uses optical encoders for pan and tilt to instantly correct the fixture s position if the fixture is jarred from its programmed position If a physical obstruction prevents the fixture from correcting its position this correction feature times out to prevent wear on the motors If the fixture s position correction has timed out remove the obstruction and home the fixture to return it to normal operation Dimmer The DL 2 fixture has a mechanical iris located in front of the projector output lens that functions as a dimmer for the fixture s output This feature gives the operator the ability to fully shutter the output and eliminate the re
239. re Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset DL 2 User Manual 119 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Sinewave Vertical w X axis Wobbulation Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 70 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the x axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset Sinewave Vertical w Y axis Wobbulation object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 71 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the y axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maxi
240. re a different power cord cap to connect the fixture to a power outlet Because of the variety of power cord caps used worldwide High End Systems Inc cannot make specific recommendations for the power cord cap Contact a local authority for the type of power cord cap needed When installing the power cord cap note that the cores in the mains lead are colored according to the following code green and yellow earth blue neutral brown live Installing a Line Cord Cap U K Only In the United Kingdom the colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in the fixture s plug Therefore install a line cord cap in accordance with the following code The core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the plug terminal which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow The core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black The core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red WARNI NG Class 1 equipment This equipment must be earthed Vatic Fitter Heads Information Danmark Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock Vigtigt Lederne med gul groen isolation maa kun tilsluttes en klemme maerket eller iL Back Panel Connections The DL 2 fixt
241. reating a Local Archive for CMA Running Windouis XP 1 Under the FILE menu select Create Local Archive to launch the archiving wizard Create Local Content Archive Wizard HIGH END SYSTEMS Selected Media Folders and Media Files Selected Object Files Seng 1 z C Documents and Settings met C Documents and S C Documents and Settings mati CAD ns d C Documente and Settings watt bare C Documerts and Settings matt Song 2 F ES C Documents and Settings mat Song 3 C Documerts and Settings matt intemission finale 2 Click on Add Media Folder This will add a media folder to the left hand column named MyMedia0 Each successive media folder will be named MyMedia1 MyMedia2 and so forth You can rename these folders by single clicking on the name of the folder 3 After creating a folder and renaming it if you wish highlight the folder to add media files 4 Click Add Media This will bring up a file browser window that will allow you to navigate to the spot on your hard drive containing the media you want to add You can add single files or multiple files To add multiple files hold down shift and select multiple media files with your mouse 146 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA 5 Click Add Objects if you wish to add custom 3 D objects to the archive This will again bring up a file browser window to navigate to you 3 D objects Any 3 D objects a
242. rection to any DL 2 output including image Collages You can use these adjustments in conjunction with Keystone parameters and Ratio parameters to refine the output shape on any of these surfaces You can access the Curved Surface Support for a surface type in the Global Effects 1 or Global Effects 2 parameter DMX Value Surface 135 Curved Vertical Convex Cylinder opening toward projector 136 Curved Vertical Concave Cylinder opening away from projector 137 Vertical Inside Corner opening toward projector 138 Vertical Outside Corner opening away from projector 139 Sphere 140 Convex Disk opening away from projector After you have selected the surface the Modifier parameters operate as described below Modifier 1 Parameter Modifier 1 lets you adjust the amount of correction vertically A value of 0 no adjustment The correction increases as you increase value to maximum at 255 100 Modifier 2 Parameter In situations where you are projecting from any angle other than perpendicular to the surface you can use Modifier 2 to adjust the vertical center of the image A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward 0 moves the vertical center down 114 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions to the bottom of the image Values above the midrange move the vertical center up to the top of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Parameter In situatio
243. reen Mod3 blue RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to inverted green Mod3 blue to 17 inverted blue 16 180 DL 2 User Manual 23 Global Effect 1 RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue 18 Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to inverted red 19 Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison 20 threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 21 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Texture Ripple Horizontal 22 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular 24 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular 25 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using 26 Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 27 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color
244. rns the projector lamp on when the fixture starts up regardless of whether there is a DMX Art Net signal If there is no DMX Art Net signal the lamp shuts off when the shutdown timeout period expires Manual turns on the projector lamp only when set to On via DMX Menu or the CMA DL 2 User Manual 29 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System DMX only turns the lamp on when it receives a DMX signal or Art Net signal connected to it When the internal projector menu is selected for display you may need to manually adjust the zoom and or focus parameters to view the display clearly The Zoom Override and Focus Override options override the DMX values sent by the console and allow you to control Zoom and focus manually with a DMX decimal value between 0 255 Projector Ceiling rotates the image 180 degrees so you can adjust for whether the fixture is hung in the air or sitting on the floor Projector Rear projects a mirror invert of the image Projector Menu Command Default for rear screen projection applications LANGUAGE ENGLISH Projector Control M b t to On to displ SESS OFF rojector Control Menu can be set to On to display REAR OFF the projector s menu system In this state the INPUT3 SVIDEO directional front panel buttons multi directional switch SYSTEM AUTO and the buttons on either side of it control the INPUT1 RGB projector menu rather than the LCD menu SCREEN NORMAL INPUT2
245. rt Net Subnet 0 10 0 1 220 Art Net Universe 10 0 1 220 Disk Free Space 10 0 1 220 DMX Protocol 10 0 1 220 Fixture ID Refresh SB MT H User Media User Objects H Stock Media Stock Objects Ann nnunulumgpoo m Bi 10 0 1 220 DMX Source m i Axon 1 10 0 1 220 Start Channel 001 El Ig OOOCFIAECDBA 1 10 0 1 220 Data Loss Timeout Iri Reset Long E Matt s DL 2 1 10 0 1 220 Display Invert On 15 All Configuration 10 0 1 220 Display Level On 10 0 1 220 Fixture Defaults Off 10 0 1 220 Fixture Hours 151 To select a DMX Source type 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and HIGH END SYSTEMS double click on the line with DMX Source in the Name column to bring up the edit dialog box Choose a new configuration value 2 Choose between DMX512 and ArtNet as the source owxs2 El from the drop down list in the option field Cancel Edit Configuration To Select a DMX Protocol type 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and MORENO SISTEMS double click on the line with DMX Protocol in the Name column to bring up the edit dialog box Chocae a new configuration value 2 Choose Standard Dual or Single from the drop Standerd down list in the option field Sandia ud 16 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration To edit the DMX Start Channel 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane S HIGH END SYSTE
246. rt multiple SVideo formats including NTSC_M PAL_B PAL_H SECAM_B SECAM_K NTSC_MJ PAL_D PAL I SECAM D SECAM K1 PAL G PAL M SECAM G SECAM L PAL N SECAM H SECAM L1 Note The format must be set to NTSC M to receive input from the internal camera Restoring Factory Defaults Selecting On in the Factory Defaults field restores all factory default fixture settings Set Projector Screen g Prof I Internal The projector tab provides settings related to det nput Y 3 the internal projector functionality 3 Projector In By DMX Y i Projector Lamp On Use the Projector Input option to select E Pro rup DMX which input the projector should accept When Jj Zoom Override 128 3 Off i External is selected the projector takes input Z i E directly from an external source and bypasses 4 Focus Override 128 3 Off 3 the internal graphics engine When Internal 2 Projector Ceiling Off 3 is selected the projector takes input directly Projector Rear Off from the graphics engine Internal is the Projector OSD Menu Activate default configuration setting Projector Defaults Reset Setting the Projector In By DMX field to Yes sets DMX as the projector s input source The Projector Lamp field lets you manually turn the lamp On or Off Use the Projector Powerup to choose the control option for turning the lamp on The options are ALWAYS ON MANUAL DMX This only takes effect when the fixture powers up Always On tu
247. s Because you have control of many parameters there are sometimes several ways to accomplish the same look For Example to make an object appear larger you can scale it along the x y and z axis or you can apply a global control to zoom in on the z axis from a viewpoint that makes the object seem to increase in size Which solution you choose depends to a large extent on the transition to other effects you want to achieve 40 DL 2 User Manual DMX Protocol Overview CHAPTER 5 Graphics Engine Overview Global Intensity 95 133 Opacity 1 P Global Effect 1 96 134 3 D Object File an 2 Global Effect 1 Modifier 1 97 135 Media Folder 3 Tilt Global Effect 1 Modifier 2 98 136 Media file i 4 Global Effect 1 Modifier 3 99 137 l In frame 5 Dimmer Global Effect 2 100 138 6 Focus Global Effect 2 Modifier 1 101 139 T Out frame 7 Zoom Global Effect 2 Modifier 2 102 140 8 Mspeed Global Effect 2 Modifier 3 103 141 Play mode 9 Macro Mask Select default iris 104 142 Play speed 10 Control Function Mask Size 105 143 Sync Mode Mask Edge 106 144 Sync To 11 Z Edge Fade Top 107 145 Visual mode oom 12 Edge Fade Right 108 146 Visual Mode Modifier 1 13 F Edge Fade Bottom 109 147 Visual Mode Modifier 2 ocus 14 Edge Fade Left 110 148 Graphic Effect 1 15
248. s and folders Control DMX value assignment to files and folders Move files and folders between your local drive and a DL 2 fixture server Move files between networked DL 2 fixtures 232 DL 2 User Manual Appendix D DL 2 Specifications Fixture mechanical electrical optical and component cpecifications are listed Mechanical Fixture Dimensions 595mm x 598mm x 911mm 23 4in x 23 6in x 35 9in Weight 53 5 kg 118 Ibs Road Case Dimensions 699mm x 724mm x 1080mm 27 5in x 28 5in x 42 5in Weight Fixture Roadcase 107 5kg 237lbs DO QE VI Iv 911 359i 317 mm 236in 12 5 in i Al mm E E 11 9 in SY o ca 594mm gt 23 4 in 1 m 517 mm bn 20 4 in DL 2 User Manual 233 APPENDIX D DL 2 Specifications Electrical Specifications WARNING AN Class 1 equipment This equipment must be earthed Input ratings 100 120V 7 0A maximum 50 60Hz 200 240V 3 5A 50 60Hz Power factor 0 94 Fuse Power supply output fuse 5A 250V slow blow only Lamp 300W NSH Light Output 5000 ANSI lumens Rated Lamp Life 1500 hours Projector Specifications Aspect ratio 4 3 native Brightness uniformity 90 Contrast ratio 1200 1 full on full off Display technology 1 3 LCD w MLA 3 panels Panel resolution 1024 x 768 dots Zoom Lens Throw Ratio 1 8 2 4 1 Camera Module Specification Co
249. s not backlit press the LCD power button see LCD Display Adjustment Buttons on page 20 Check the Video In Video Out adapter on the video card middle plug connection Check that the connectors for the composite video cable at the LCD Screen and the Video card are seated securely Verify that the last unit on the DMX link is properly terminated see Setting up a Standard DMX Link on page 10 To control the DL 2 with DMX you must first enable DMX through the menu System see DMX Control Screen on page 25 or the CMA see Viewing and Editing Fixture Configuration on page 151 If you re using DMX to control the projector using its native menu system make sure you send a safe command after each button command otherwise it s analogous to pressing a button on the projector menu system and not releasing it see page Projector Control on page 129 DL 2 User Manual 169 CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions How are DL 2 fixture I P addresses determined n environments that utilize numerous DL 2s is there risk of IP address conflicts DL 2 fixture IP addresses are determined one of two ways 1 When using DHCP server like router IP is generated automatically 2 Without router IP is generated randomly by Windows called Auto IP The generation of IP addresses is handled just as IP addresses are handled for Window networks Is there a limit to the Ethernet cable run length fr
250. s the red component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow at a value of 255 10096 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan at a value of 255 10096 RGB Scale Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 47 Reduce and increase color components in the image as a part of the overall color range Note the maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 sets overall color range Modifier 1 Scales Red in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value Modifier 2 Scales Green in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value Modifier 3 Scales Blue in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value DL 2 User Manual 107 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Swap to BGR Y Object Effect W Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 41 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become green and all blue values become red Green values are unaffected Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 green M
251. s you choose the text color that will best display over your selected image Gray Red Blue BL wo Mm Green DL 2 User Manual 87 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Masking Control Mask Shape Select and Strobing The Mask Select parameter lets you choose a mask to frame or overlay a composite image You can choose to apply a mask to an image when you don t want an entire image to be seen or you want to transition from an image to black or a solid color without fading intensity Mask Shapes The DL 2 graphics engine currently provides 30 mask shapes including circular rectangular and oval masks that close from inside out or outside in Checker Board Radial Wipes and Multi panel options are also included with several variations Default DMX Value 0 Round iris mask closing from outside in DMX values 0 127 0 50 are reserved for static mask shapes Values of 128 255 51 100 are reserved for strobing Mask shapes Values not yet implemented default to 128 Strobing Mask Shapes A strobing version of each simple mask shape is defined in the 128 255 51 10096 DMX value range When a strobing mask is selected the strobe rate is controlled by the Mask Edge Fade parameter from the slowest 0 to the fastest 255 100 Note Strobe DMX Mask value VE Shapes 0 128 Round
252. sen Compliance Engineer DL 2 User Manual iti Product Modification Warning High End Systems products are designed and manufactured to meet the requirements of United States and International safety regulations Modifications to the product could affect safety and render the product non compliant to relevant safety standards Mise En Garde Contre La Modification Du Produit Les produits High End Systems sont concus et fabriqu s conform ment aux exigences des r glements internationaux de s curit Toute modification du produit peut entrainer sa non conformit aux normes de s curit en vigueur Produktmodifikationswarnung Design und Herstellung von High End Systems entsprechen den Anforderungen der U S Amerikanischen und internationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften Abanderungen dieses Produktes k nnen dessen Sicherheit beeintr chtigen und unter Umst nden gegen die diesbez glichen Sicherheitsnormen versto en Avvertenza Sulla Modifica Del Prodotto prodotti di High End Systems sono stati progettati e fabbricati per soddisfare i requisiti delle normative di sicurezza statunitensi ed internazionali Qualsiasi modifica al prodotto potrebbe pregiudicare la sicurezza e rendere il prodotto non conforme agli standard di sicurezza pertinenti Advertencia De Modificaci n Del Producto Los productos de High End Systems est n disefiados y fabricados para cumplir los requisitos de las reglamentaciones de seguridad de los Estados Unidos e i
253. set at their default values a rectangle measuring 13 0m 9 65m Om will just fill the screen Objects are stored in Microsoft s DirectX x format x files may be stored in either text form or binary form DL 2 User Manual 231 APPENDIX C Custom User Content An object can have one layer one surface and one file texture An object s UV texture coordinates should be in the range 0 0 1 0 to insure proper presentation UV coordinates outside this range will wrap to this range but the results are not predictable All polygons should be triangles when creating objects it can be easier to work with polygons that have more than three sides However an object should only contain triangles three sided polygons when ultimately saved for use with the graphics engine An object can contain multiple disconnected subobjects as long as item 4 is followed An example would be an object composed of an array of disconnected spheres or cubes Managing Custom Content The Content Management Application running on your own computer as a client to DL 2 media servers via Ethernet manages any User Content you create All Stock and User content can be viewed and refreshed but the CMA client gives you additional control over other aspects of your custom content Sections under Managing User Content on page 141 in Chapter 14 describe the User content management functions including instructions on how to Rename files and folders Delete file
254. sidual luminance from video black The Dimmer parameter controls the dimming iris adjustment from closed DMX value 0 to fully open DMX value 255 Focus The Focus parameter controls the fixture s mechanical focus from near DMX value 0 to far DMX value 255 Zoom This Zoom parameter controls the fixture s mechanical zoom from narrow DMX value 0 to wide DMX value 255 DL 2 User Manual 127 CHAPTER 12 Fixture Motion Functions MSpeed Motor Speed The MSpeed parameter adjusts the time required for a motor to complete movement when changing from one position to another MSpeed provides a method for all motors to reach their target position at the same time even though each motor may have different distances to travel MSpeed movement is extremely smooth because the fixture controls movements independent of DMX refresh rates MSpeed times vary from 0 15 seconds to 252 7 seconds In general allowing the console to crossfade the pan and tilt values for the DL2 fixture is acceptable However extremely slow movements may require the use of Mspeed instead of console crossfades For a listing of exact MSpeed times see Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table Control Function Options The Control parameter remotely initiates various fixture operations and allows access to the internal projector menu controls Fixture Operations All of the following Fixture operation Control parameter settings except for M
255. sing 142 Horizontal doors closing from opposing sides 143 Vertical doors closing from outside in 144 Vertical wipe closing from inside out 145 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 1 146 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 2 147 Vertical panels closing from outside in 1 148 188 DL 2 User Manual 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Mask Select Mask Size Mask Edge Fade Image Edge Fade Top Image Edge Fade Right Image Edge Fade Bottom Image Edge Fade Left Top Left X Top Left Y Top Right X Top Right Y Bottom Right X Bottom Right Y Bottom Left X Bottom Left Y X Ratio Y Ratio Vertical panels closing from outside in 2 149 Vertical diamonds 1 150 Vertical diamonds 2 151 Horizontal diamonds 1 152 Horizontal diamonds 2 153 Pinwheel 154 Oval Iris closing from outside in 155 Oval Iris closing from inside out 156 Oscillating iris closing from outside in 157 Animated Dynamic lris 158 Reserved for other strobing installed masks 159 255 Adjusts mask size from fully closed to open 0 255 Hard edge to faded edge when Mask Select 0 127 Strobe rate control from Fastest to slowest 0 255 when Mask Select parameter value 128 255 Global I mage Edge Fade Adjusts the image s top edge diffusion from hard 0 255 edge 0 to maximum fade 255 Adjusts the image s right edge diffusion from hard 0 255 edge 0 to maximum fade 255 Ad
256. size Mod3 comparison threshold 21 Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 22 23 24 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 25 Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 26 Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 27 Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 28 Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 29 Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 30 Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 31 Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved 32 Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode 33 Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist 34 Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size 35 Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size 36 Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens cent
257. ssssssse me 141 Assigning DMX Values Automatically sess 141 Editing User Content DMX Values ccc cee ce cece eect emnes 142 Valid DMX Valles Lied da saad eese eren A ERE RE de 142 Moving User Content Files and Folders csecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeoeas 143 Downloading Content from a DL 2 Fixture to Your Local Drive 144 Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a DL 2 Fixture sssssessse 144 Moving Files Between Fixtures momcococonannnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnncncncarararararanananananananana 145 Archiving User Content coocccnonnconnncannncnnnnncncnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnns 146 Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline cssssssss 146 Creating a Local Archive isscecs ere a n qna 146 For CMA Running Windows XP 00cece cece eee cent eee nett eet hne 146 For CMA Running Mac OS 10 4 ise etas i eene Rn ERR RE RT 147 Creating Content Backup Archive sss eee 147 Deploying a Content Archive sssssssssssssssse m heme nemen eene 147 Cloning User Content eesieesesieslisessesesea aen nn annnm annnm aen a nnns nan 148 Deleting Content mcccococococanannnnnnanonanonnnnnnnnancnranananananancncncnrarararanananananananana 149 DMX Summary qu e eee cee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eens ua asia eee eee 149 DL 2 User Manual xvii Upgrading Software mcmonocnono
258. t amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to inverted red 19 Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search 20 size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search 21 size Mod3 comparison threshold Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 22 23 184 DL 2 User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol 27 Global Effect 2 Texture Ripple Circular Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 24 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 25 Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 26 Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 27 Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 28 Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 29 Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 30 Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 31 Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mode fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved 32 Transparent wipes Mod1 width of transp
259. t eE 26 DMX Raw Sreem sched IO 27 SetTab eiginn aN iaa ra a a a AA dada ais 28 Set Fixture Screen i e didi dec eese vu eee a iiai E E CERO ROO a aa aini cored 28 Set Projector Screen iria tarot ndis 29 File Scree a E DLL LIU UL 30 ag iep jo ETUR EUM 31 Test HOME SERRANO mutis eae tak quce eee ertet Dan eje d eda du d ic 31 Test Self Test Screen sie ntt e eere dd bep re eta taa rada 31 x DL 2 User Manual Info Tab cim hate hed lea e ha a he eee tete ole a ERA AUR eS 32 fO HOUES iii a at ameti ede aat dd ea dea dea erat tri ene dd d la 32 Info Version Sereen scene erret ded haa e RERO d nd a i EE EA VR E dan 32 ifo Status Tab mdd hades ibl ceu cit tonii ad ade ML able Meteo Imi od 32 Reset SCEBen cesa este rg ie a e decederet euet ii Pas 33 Chapter 4 DMX Programming Basics If you are new to DMX programing this chapter will give you a brief overview and tips on programming DL 2 fixtures with Wholehog consoles from High End Systems DMX Programming Overview eseessssesessesnn nennen nnn n nane n nani nn nnns 35 DMX5BI2 LinKS Leo estera tes aa eub E PUERTA YR REIR 35 Determining a DMX Start Channel ssssssssssssesse m eese 35 8 bit vs 16 bit DMX Parameters csssssssssssssse nennen enne enn 35 Lighting Consoles ocomccocococacananannnnononononnnnnnanrnrnrarararararanananancararnnancanananananans 36 FixturesErbrarigs tia del oet ho Dod dr taa e aida AC nora i i ea ae d d t
260. t edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the direction and amount of twist At the midpoint of the range there is no change in the image The twist area and size moves counterclockwise from 128 5096 smallest area to 0 largest twist area moving counterclockwise The twist area and size moves clockwise from 128 50 smallest area to 255 100 largest twist area moving clockwise Raindrop Y Object Effect Global Effect Effects Mode parameter DMX value 46 This option simulates raindrops falling on a liquid surface Modifier 1 Controls the drop size from 0 no drop to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Sets the random number generator seed number This lets you create a repeatable random sequence that will synchronize correctly when using the collage generator option see page 112 Modifier 3 Adjusts the raindrop creation rate from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate DL 2 User Manual 117 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Sinewave Circular w X axis Wobbulation Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 64 This option varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the x axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment
261. t of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Modifier 2 Compares the green component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Modifier 3 Compares the blue component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Background Color Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 131 There is a background behind every composite image You cannot rotate scale or position the background and it is visible from every viewpoint and position This option allows you to apply color to the background Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from DMX values of 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from DMX values of 0 no green to 255 10096 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from DMX values of 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Background Color Cucle Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 132 There is a background behind every composite image You cannot rotate scale or position the background and it is visible from every viewpoint and position This option allows you t
262. t to 255 100 maximum green saturation RGB Add All Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 4 This option adds color to all pixels including black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation DL 2 User Manual 105 CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Adde All Pixels Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 5 This option adds color to all pixels including black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation RGB Add to Non black Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 6 This option adds color to all pixels except black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 25
263. t to restart the internal graphics engine Software Version Read only Start Channel 0 255 External SVideo Format NTSC_M NTSC MJ PAL_B PAL_D PAL_G PAL_H PAL PAL M PAL N SECAM B SECAM D SECAM G SECAM_H SECAM K SECAM K1 SECAM L SECAM L1 Tilt Invert On Inverts Tilt positioning Off reverts to default position Unique Number Read only DL 2 User Manual 155 CHAPTER 14 Content Management Application CMA 156 DL 2 User Manual Chapter I5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes information on replacing parts cleaning the fixture and some basic troubleshooting procedures The following toolset should be all you need for the maintenance procedures in this chapter M3 allen wrench M4 allen wrench 2 Phillips screwdriver Gloves Protective eyewear Mild glass cleaner containing no ammonia and a soft lint free cotton cloth WARNING AN This fixture must be serviced by qualified personnel The information listed in this chapter is intended to assist qualified personnel only Pan and Tilt Locking The DL 2 fixture is equipped with mechanical pan and tilt locking latches to stabilize the fixture for shipping or servicing There is a single pan lock position and three tilt lock positions Tilt Lock Y se Y Mor CI osea losa DH Tilt Lock Position Options Pan Lock DL 2 User Manual 15
264. tain their value until reset even after shutdown and re homing For example if the Control parameter is set to switch the unit to Ceiling orientation then the 213 216 Projector Front Projection unit will remain in Ceiling orientation until another command is sent to switch back to Floor This allows the Control parameter to revert to another value without losing the orientation or mirroring status 209 212 Projector Ceiling Orientation 217 220 Projector Rear Projection Input from External RGBHV Video input can be utilized with either RGBHV or VGA but not to Projector both You can select between RGBHV and VGA in the menu system see DMX_Control Screen on page 25 RGBHV is the factory default 221 224 225 228 Graphics Engine to Projector Input from S Video In 229 232 camera to Camera Out to Before using DMX to change DL 2 inputs you must enable the Projector Input by DMX option in the menu system see Set_Projector Screen on page 29 or through the CMA see Input from Camera to Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 152 Once the selection is made allow about 10 seconds for the change to take effect Graphics Engine 233 236 Graphics Engine default CAUTION Do not physically connect both the VGA and the RGBHV connectors at the same time Doing so can damage the projector and void the warranty DL 2 User Manual 129 CHAPTER 12 Fixture Motion Functions Using the
265. tation apply visual effects and color mix each graphic object You can create and control up to three of these objects and then apply global effects to the composite image The DL 2 fixture provides a fully equipped internal digital camera and IR illuminator to input live video to its own graphic engine or to another DL 2 fixture or device While combining camera and light from the same source to allow a unique point of view the camera also features optical and digital zoom frame rate and invert effects as well as freeze frame color negative and grayscale conversion effects The ability to point the camera at it s own projection combined with adjustable zoom creates unique realtime video feedback and hall of mirrors effects The IR illuminator allows visibility focusing and fading in blackout situations The Content Management Application CMA runs on your workstation or laptop computer and communicates with DL 2 fixtures over an Ethernet network The CMA lets you remotely upload move and clone content files configure fixtures and upgrade software Features System DL 2 software based on Windows XP Embedded and DirectX technology Powerful Content Management and Configuration software can remotely manage multiple DL 2 fixtures Integrated Sony camera with Super HAD technology and infrared illuminator provides live video input and output from fixture location Supports importing of custom content including 3D objects
266. te video input and output switching let you select live video from external source including another DL 2 fixture s camera feed Full color display and menu functions Powered by a 3 2GHZ Pentium 4 HT processor with an ATI X850XT Graphics Processor Gigabit Ethernet for fast content uploading and multiple fixture synchronization Mounting system provides multiple orientation options Related Products and Optional Accessories The following table lists related products and accessories available for the DL 2 fixture For more information contact your High End Systems dealer distributor see Contacting High End Systems 9 on page ii Part Description Part Number Replacement lamp 55030070 Replacement Filter fixture head 80260014 Replacement Filter Projector Lamp Large 80260017 5 amp slow blow fuse 90403012 Frontwindow BOBB0074 Wholehog 3 lighting console 61020001 Hog iPC lighting console 74020001 Galvanized safety cable 12040001 Mega Claw clamp 67040007 Male 5 pin DMX terminator 90404039 Heavy duty 5 pin XLR cable 107 55050017 Heavy duty 5 pin XLR cable 25 55050018 Heavy duty 5 pin XLR cable 50 55050019 Heavy duty 5 pin XLR cable 100 55050020 DL 2 User Manual 3 CHAPTER 1 Product Overview 4 DL 2 User Manual Chapter e Setup and Configuration Hardware setup includes mounting connecting to power and Ethernet and DMX linking Software setup includes
267. ted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Reserved Defaults to effect 0 52 63 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 64 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation 65 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation 66 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation 67 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation 68 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 212 DL 2 User Manual Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset oa Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation 70 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation 71 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 114 o 2 Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation 72 NA 0 0 oce Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 73 Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 Blue cycle 74 speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 255 Effect Mode 2 Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no ses 2 1 1 s Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum 0 235 a ia n Effect Mode
268. ter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Modifier1 DMX value 128 50 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 68 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Gray maker 2 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 5 This option converts a color image to grayscale and then lets you adjust black level and contrast NOTE If content is already grayscale there is no effect applied but Modifier 2 can still affect image contrast Modifier 1 Adjusts the black level of the grayscale image from a DMX value of 0 Full brightness to 255 completely black Modifier 2 Adjusts contrast of the grayscale image from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum contrast L le a 232 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 90 33 396 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 175 7796 DL 2 User Manual 69 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Posterizer Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 This effect uses the associated Modifier 1 parameter to posterize by replacing each color in an image with the highest values of that color but expanding it only to the border of that color There is no bleeding or blending of colors Note In this visual mode you won t see a change in the image until you adjust the Modifier 1 parameter Modifier 1 Adjusts color polarization lev
269. ter system needs immediate servicing Replace Filter For these and other Error Warning messages see Status Message Menu Display on page 165 Cleaning and Replacing Filters The DL 2 system utilizes multiple filters to protect the internal media server and projector A filter is located on the side of the fixture base housing attached with velcro for easy removal and cleaning Check this filter often for dust or debris that can be caused when using the DL 2 in environments with confetti or pyrotechnics This filter is washable but must be completely dry before re installing The Fixture head contains both a hepa filter and a prefilter The internal projector has two filters Check the following warnings and cautions before servicing the filters WARNINGS AN Disconnect power before servicing Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only 158 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling CAUTION N Do not operate a projector with Air Filter removed Dust may accumulate on LCD Panel and Projection Mirror degrading projection quality Do not put small parts into Air I ntake Vents It may result in malfunction of a projector Cleaning the Base Housing Filter This filter is located between the handles on the fan side of the box You can pull it off the fixture Top cover
270. that line Use the scroll bar at the left of the offset number to scroll through all the values The Refresh Rate is the rate at which DMX is being received by the fixture With Refresh Timer set to On you see the raw DMX values updated instantly asu yal our am s xwa Mey ooojoid ouo E CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Offset Refresh Rate 25 2 goof 128 000 128 000 000 128 128 000 000 010 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 020 000 000 255 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 030 000 000 255 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 040 000 000 000 000 000 000 128 128 000 128 050 000 128 000 118 052 000 000 000 001 001 060 000 000 000 255 255 000 128 000 000 001 070 000 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 080 128 000 128 000 128 000 128 128 128 128 090 000 128 000 128 000 000 001 001 000 000 100 000 255 255 000 128 000 000 001 000 000 110 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 128 000 120 128 000 128 000 128 128 128 128 000 128 130 000 128 000 000 001 001 000 000 000 255 Refresh Timer On DL 2 User Manual 27 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Set Tab Set_Fixture Screen g F The Fixture tab provides options for selecting or a 5 Pan Invert off il changing fixture movement dimming the 2 3 Tilt Invert Off mechanical iris and controlling the LCD display 2 Pan Tilt Swap OFF O M black level and orientation Data Loss Timeout Iris Long E Movement Opt
271. ther AN Original Object 1 and Object 2 X axis Rotation Applied to Object 2 DL 2 User Manual 53 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Y Rotation The Y Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Object around the Y axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a horizontal flip at variable speeds This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 94 Default DMX Value 32768 50 No Y Rotation of Value Range 1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around Y axis fast to slow 25 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around Y axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around Y axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around Y axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around Y axis slow to fast Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object through another Original Object 1 and Object 2 Y axis rotation applied to Object 2 54 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Z Rotation The Z Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Obje
272. tion 72 Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 73 Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 blue cycle 74 speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 255 Effect Mode 1 Adjusts effect selected in Effect Mode 1 from no ane 0 255 1 100 0 0 13 Modifier 1 adjustment at a DMX value of 0 to maximum Effect Mode 1 adjustment at 255 100 The type of 74 Modifier 2 adjustment depends on the effect 0 255 1 100 0 0 Effect Mode 1 Note for some effects one or more modifiers 75 Modifier 3 may not be used 0 255 1 100 0 0 DL 2 User Manual 197 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Off no effects selection CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values 3 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 4 RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels 6 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR 8 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value DMX value invert color 9 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Effect ene gt 10 76 Mod1 r
273. tion correctly if contact screws are missing from driver boards DL 2 User Manual 163 CHAPTER 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fixture Head Driver Board To replace the fixture head driver board 1 2 3 4 Carefully replace the rear bezel making sure to place but do Disconnect power to the fixture and allow it to cool Unlatch the two rear latches and remove the rear bezel Use a 3 mm allen wrench to remove the addressing screws and star washers Position new board against module aligning the center top standoff Place contact screw s in the appropriate position Note When installing a replacement driver board on a module always place a star washer between an address screw and the pad on the logic board to ensure good electrical contact not force the gasket over the lamp cover located on the back of the projector Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface Select Calibrate Motors through the Test_Home menu screen and leave the fixture undisturbed for 10 minutes while calibration occurs Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board To replace motor driver board located in the fixture base housing 1 Disconnect power to the fixture If the fixture has been operating allow the fixture to cool before handling 2 Loosen the two phillips head screws on menu display panel side of the Box cover 3 Loosen screws on menu display panel and gently open away from the fixture leaving the harness
274. tion of the texture Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around Reduces Enhances Edge 38 detection picture elements Color Contrast Lm sensitivity Color DeConverge offsets pixels from original Moves Red Moves Green Moves Blue 39 osition ieleu Pixels down Pixels down P P P and right and left 40 Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect Defines Not Used Not Used mirror center 41 RGB swap to BGR Red to Blue Green Blue to Red 42 RGB swap to RBG Red Green to Blue Blue to Green 43 RGB swap to GRB Red to Green Green to Red Blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity Selects Color Solbes Zerg Controls 44 intensity to color Scheme fading point i Defines 45 Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity Selects Color Intensity Controls transparent Scheme bandwidth Transparency n jars Seeds Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a liquid Controls Controls 46 random a surface size speed raindrop rate generator 47 RGB Scale varies color value Red Green Blue 48 Tiling On x axis scaler y axis scaler NA 49 Color to Alpha Red to alpha reer io Blue to alpha alpha 50 Color to Alpha Inverted Inverted red Inverted Inverted blue toalpha green to alpha to alpha Selects Selects Crossfade 51 Texture Mixing Source Source Effect Between Texture Level Textures 64 Sinewave Circular with x axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 65 Sinewave Circular with y axis wobbulation Amplitude Frequency Phase 66 Si
275. to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red 18 RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 19 20 Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 21 Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 22 Texture Ripple Vertical Mod size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 23 Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 24 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 25 Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 26 Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 27 Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 28 Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 29 NA DL 2 User Manual 195 APPENDIX A DL 2 DMX Protocol Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color 31 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32 image Mod3 not used r
276. ts Horizontal corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Vertical Center Center 138 Curved Surface Vertical Outside Corner Adjusts Adjusts Horizontal corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Vertical Center Center 139 Curved Surface Sphere corrects shape Adjusts Adjusts Horizontal projecting on curved surface Correction Vertical Center Center 140 Curved Surface Convex Disk corrects Adjusts Adjusts Horizontal shape projecting on curved surface Correction Vertical Center Center These options are listed alphabetically with additional detail in Chapter 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions on page 97 Global Control The Global Control parameter allows access to different global control modes How you set the Global control parameter determines the functionality of the Global Control Modifier parameter Setting this parameter to a DMX value of 255 brings up On screen programming statistics In this case the Global Control Modifier parameter controls the text color Four in One Control Option The Four in One control option maps the media file content of each of the graphics objects and the combined output to a four quadrant grid This option helps you visualize what the graphics engine is doing When the Global Control parameter is set to a DMX value 253 you can use the Global Control Modifier parameter to control the Four in One control option You will be able to observe the Collage and C
277. ture server Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders You can Rename any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window using the pull down Media Folders or 3D Objects menu or with a right click selection Use the standard Windows operating system naming conventions You can Delete any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window using the pull down Media Folders or 3D Objects menu or with a right click selection Note You cannot Delete a movie if the DL 2 server is playing it Assigning DMX Values to User Content The DMX Value associated with each file and folder makes it easy to use the DMX control protocol to identify a unique media file or 3D object There are up to 240 Media file folders with each capable of containing up to 255 image or movie media files This gives a theoretical total of 61 200 possible locations for Media image or movie files There is one DMX parameter used to identify a 3D object so 255 DMX values are available between the Stock and User Content to identify 3D objects Assigning DMX Values Automatically The CMA can automatically assign a unique DMX value to any file or folder on a fixture that does not already have a value This automated assignment is based on alphabetically sorting the existing file folder names and assigning each item a unique consecutive integer To automatically assign DMX values to a single file or folder with user content
278. ty from the display navigation editing buttons has passed the Status Message List SMPIS uoisiaA sinoH Status Message Detail Proj Status Cooling u 3591 our a S XW the lamp display returns to the large format error display should there be any new messages to be displayed or if there is a persistent error A persistent error is a case where the error condition continues to occur Projector must cool down before it can re strike The second way to view Status messages is by navigating to the Info Status screen This screen displays current error or status messages If there are multiple error warning messages displayed use the up down arrows to scroll through the list in the top pane When an item is highlighted in the top pane the bottom pane details information associated with that error Supported rror Warning Messages Projector Temperature Status Motion Shut Down Status Issue Large Format Message Message Detail PROJ STATUS COOLING The projector must cool down before it can re strike the lamp Notes This message will end when the fixture has reached the recom mended operational temperature Info Status tab only This message does not appear in large format Motion Shut Down The Motion Systems is in shut down mode To return to normal operation power cycle or perform a HOME ALL Home the fixture through the menu System Test Home Motion All Home
279. unctions Defining Content on page 43 Chapter 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale on page 51 Chapter 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects on page 65 and Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content on page 79 x 8 E j Motion Camera i Pan 41409 Zoom 32767 ut f i Tilt O Focus 33023 i i 3 Gate 255 Infrared 0 Ei Focus 127 Shutter 0 3 Zoom 127 WhiteBal 0 MSpeed O Orient 0 8 Macro 0 Effects 0 a Control 0 RedGain 0 3 Blue Gain 0 E E Intensity 255 FxiMode 11 02 03 0 3 E Fx2Mode 01 02 03 0 Lee i Mask Sell 0 Size255Fade 0 EE Edge Fade T OR OB OL O w KeyTopX oY OX OY o 3 keyBttmx oY ox ov o Key RatioX 128 Y 128 E 3 fiewMode 0 View Pos X 32768 Y 32768 Z 30260 3 Cntri Mode O Cntri Val lo Rotation X 32767 Y 33067 Z 33142 Scale X 127 Y 127 E Position X 32767 Y 32767 Z 32767 Y127 2127 iii Opacity 255 Objet 7 9 MediaDir 7 MediaFile 7 3 InFrame O Out Frame 65535 7 PlayMode Play Speed 192 iris Sync Type 0 SyncTo 0 VisMode 11 02 0 3 FxiMode 31 02 03 0 m y FxiMode 01 02 03 0 gf E El 26 DL 2 User Manual DMX_Raw Screen You can view the DMX values of all fixtures on the link The Raw Tab displays every DMX value for Channels 001 512 in lines of eight DMX values each per screen The Offset number at the beginning of each line indicates the first DMX channel with a value displayed on
280. uration Using the CMA ssssssssssm mm hene 16 Shutting Down the Fixture oomcnocncnonacnonncnnrannnrnnnnnnncnnnncnnnncnnrncnnrnrnnrncnnrncnnnas 17 Recommended Shutdown Options sesssssssssss e mese 17 Placing Fixture in Road Case seipsa aeei edenin eme ene 17 Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System You can use the DL 2 fixture s Menu System to configure the fixture review diagnostic feedback and view content information Menu Panel Components ccscseseeeeeeceeeeueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueueueuaueuauauaueuaueneneeeneeeas 19 LCD Display Adjustment Buttons sssssssssss ms memes 20 LCD Display Power Button eee ebd e nu nr n nn nn ERRARE ER 20 LCD Display Menu Options and Selection sssssses eee eee naan eee 20 Navigating the Menu coconnnonononnnnnanacacacacacanancncarararararananananananananananancananananasa 21 DL 2 Menu Options eocccnonnncnnnncannncnnnncnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrananenos 22 Menu Screen Descriptions ocoonoconnncnnnnnannncannncnnnnnnnnnnrncnnrnnnnrncnnrnnnnrncnnrnnnnnaos 25 DMX Tab eere me de tee dinar aia e OR ts 25 DMX Control Sereen eren atas ade dread rt rrr desee ae o xa dera ce 25 DMX Protocol Tab 2 52 e cum viene tov re rut ere Yi ea teet ute ele alea 26 DMX Protocol Motion Screen ssssssssss ee mmm eene 26 DMX Protocol Global Sereen i1 atro xt phot tura ee xe reg e reed 26 DMX Protocol Obj Screens ore Ire rea dde erd
281. ure s back panel provides ports for 5 pin DMX Data I n and Data Out see Setting up a Standard DMX Link on page 10 for more information Ethernet to connect to other DL 2 fixtures and your computer running the Content Management Application CMA software on a fixture link see Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link on page 11 Two USB ports for connecting peripheral drives to assist with troubleshooting 6 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration RGBHV VGA and S Video In options for video input Camera Out provides S Video output from the internal camera to another DL 2 fixture or other external video output device CAUTION To avoid damaging the fixture and voiding the warranty do not physically connect to the RGBHV and VGA inputs at the same time Receive LED indicates Link LED indicates hardware DMX data coming in connection via ethernet Activity LED indicates CMA Transmit LED indicates A connection DMX data going out Ethernet port to Two USB ports 5 pin DMX512 connect DL 2 fixtures for peripherals Data In and to fixture link and including hard drives Data Out personal computer running the CMA J UN L1 RECEIVE Q o yr TRANSMIT 100 120 V Nep 50 60Hz 7A inp O 4 A ETHERNET DUT IN OO c 00000 CAMERA S VIDEO VGA v H B G R Dur IN IN VGA Input for S Video Output to anoth r ari external source RGBHV input fixture for external S Video In video source
282. urved Surface support effects as well as up to 3 effects applied to each graphical object DL 2 User Manual 85 CHAPTER 10 Global Functions Setting a DMX value 31 32 or 33 lets you display up to three effects applied to a Graphic Object These effects are accessed according to rendering heirarchy used by the graphics engine The following table sets up an example of three graphic objects with x s indicating applied effects Visual Effect x x Graphic Effect 1 x x Graphic Effect 2 x x x Using the example above the following table describes the results for Four in One control values selected in the Global Control Modifer parameter Graphic Object 1 Texture Visual Effect Graphic Object 2 Texture Effect 1 Graphic Object 3 Texture Visual Effect Graphic Object 1 Texture Visual Effect Effect 2 Final Composite Image Graphic Object 2 Texture Effect 1 Effect 2 Graphic Object 3 Texture Visual Effect Effect 1 Graphic Object 1 Texture Visual Effect Effect 2 Final Composite Image Graphic Object 2 Texture Effect 1 Effect 2 33 Graphic Object 3 Texture Visual Effect Effect 1 Effect 2 Final Composite Image 86 DL 2 User Manual On Screen Frame Statistics CHAPTER 10 Global Functions When the Global Control parameter is set at a DMX Value of 255 the Global Control Modifier channel let
283. ust the size of the lens and move it over different areas of the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the lens centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the lens centerpoint from O top edge to 255 10096 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the lens from O smallest to 255 100 largest Tip Zooming in with this lens option creates an additional effect 116 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Picture in Picture M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 35 This options creates a window in the image containing a scaled down version of the same image and then lets you position it anywhere on the output plane Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the subpicture s centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the subpicture s centerpoint from O top edge to 255 10096 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the picture from O smallest to 255 100 largest Pixel Tuiist Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 34 This option introduces a twisted area to the image and allows to you size it and move it in the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 righ
284. way to apply a fade to the composite image Tip The Dimmer Object Opacity and Global Intensity parameters all have to be greater than 0 to make a defined image visible Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 2255 100 Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 255 100 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 179 70 DL 2 User Manual 63 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Visual Mode Visual Mode options are defined using three parameters The Visual Mode parameter has options for enhancing and adjusting the black level and contrast of a 3 D object Once you choose a visual mode two Modifier parameters adjust the selected mode Note In most cases you won t see a change in the content until the Modifier parameters for that mode are adjusted Default DMX Value 0 Safe no processing applied Modifier 1 Default DMX Value 0 Full Brightness Modifier 2 Default DMX Value 0 No Contrast adjustment The following table illustrates the interaction between the Visual Mode Parameter and the two associated Modifier parameters for each option Visual Mode Options Adjustments DMX s m i Value Name Definition Modifier 1 Modifier 2 No visual mode processing applied 0 Safe to rendered output Not Used Not Used 1 Content Enhances image black level and Adjusts Adjusts Optimization contrast Back Level Contrast Push Fades from original image color to Adjusts to Sepia sepia F
285. xis A value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0 maximum image magnification Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the x axis A value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0 maximum image magnifica tion Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255 100 maxi mum Modifier 3 Not Used NOTE The Tiling effect implemented on Effect 1 overrides tiling on Effect 2 124 DL 2 User Manual CHAPTER 11 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Transparent Wipes Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 33 Transparent wipes let you open one graphic to reveal another graphic behind it You can select from six options and the centerline of the effect 1 42 Rectangle wipes from center out horizontally 3 43 84 Rectangle wipes from edges out horizontally 85 126 Wipes from center out vertically 127 170 Wipes from edges out vertically THS 171 212 Cross shape wipes from center out E gt A v 212 255 Box shape wipes from edges outward Y Modifier 1 Adjusts the area of the wipe from the smallest at a value of 0 to the largest at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Selects the cente
286. xture Also please be sure that any new content you obtain from outside Sources is properly cleared for public presentation This sounds really difficult and don t know how to do it What do I do to properly license copyrighted material You need to consult with a Content Clearing House or with a properly licensed Intellectual Property Attorney Content clearinghouses are typically less expensive to work with and have well established industry relations that can result in cost savings High End Systems uses and highly recommends Suzy Vaughan Associates Suzy Vaughan Associates has 20 years of experience in clearing clips talent and music for use in any number of venues Their clients include Barbara Streisand Michael Jackson and The Emmys among other shows DL 2 User Manual vii You can obtain more information about Suzy Vaughan Associates services by calling 818 988 5599 or emailing info suzyvaughan com Their website is www suzyvaughan com Suzy Vaughan is also an attorney specializing in intellectual property issues How much does it typically cost to license copyrighted material The answer depends entirely on what material you want to use and how you plan to use it Prices can range from hundreds of dollars for photography content to thousands of dollars for a highly desirable film video clip Since price is content sensitive the best thing to do is to contact a clearinghouse like Suzy Vaughan Associates and let them find out for y
287. y the Out Frame coarse and fine channels When the with statistics option is selected the composite output includes text data related to the selected frame Remember that the In Frame and Out Frame parameters are defined as a DMX value mapped to the percentage of the media file length not a specific frame Note If the Global Control Mode parameter 255 a DMX value of 1 3 for the Global Control parameter provides an alternate font color to enhance statistics readability Playback Speed The Playback Speed parameter controls the speed of the selected media file s Playback Mode The Playback Speed for a media file is used whenever the Playback Mode Parameter s DMX value is assigned to any Play Forward option Default DMX Value 128 Playback at normal speed A DMX value of 0 or 128 50 plays back media files at the original recorded speed DMX values from 1 to 127 plays the media file back at an increasing speed from slowest to the original recorded speed Values from 129 255 set playback speed from faster than normal to fastest speed DL 2 User Manual 49 CHAPTER 6 Graphic Functions Defining Content 50 DL 2 User Manual Chapter 7 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale You can independently control each Graphic Object s rotation direction and speed along with it s position and scale in x y and z axis directions The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you def

High End DL2 Digital Light Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents